TW440741B - Color liquid crystal display device - Google Patents

Color liquid crystal display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW440741B
TW440741B TW086119352A TW86119352A TW440741B TW 440741 B TW440741 B TW 440741B TW 086119352 A TW086119352 A TW 086119352A TW 86119352 A TW86119352 A TW 86119352A TW 440741 B TW440741 B TW 440741B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
liquid crystal
color
light
area
crystal display
Prior art date
Application number
TW086119352A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Takashi Miyashita
Tetsushi Yoshida
Hidetoshi Akao
Tsuyoshi Toyoshima
Jiro Takei
Original Assignee
Casio Computer Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP8345850A external-priority patent/JPH10186347A/en
Priority claimed from JP9077905A external-priority patent/JPH10268289A/en
Priority claimed from JP9077907A external-priority patent/JPH10268299A/en
Priority claimed from JP9127227A external-priority patent/JPH10319386A/en
Priority claimed from JP13357297A external-priority patent/JP3633206B2/en
Application filed by Casio Computer Co Ltd filed Critical Casio Computer Co Ltd
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW440741B publication Critical patent/TW440741B/en

Links

Abstract

In a liquid crystal display device using color filters, the area of each of color filters arranged on the inner surface of one of substrates in correspondence with the pixel areas is set to be smaller than that of each pixel area to form non-colored light exit areas, and color pixels are displayed with non-colored light which is not transmitted through the color filters and colored light which is transmitted through the color filters. Since high-luminance color pixels are displayed with these colored light and non-colored light, the screen can be made brighter. The liquid crystal display device further includes a reflecting member for reflecting external light incident from the front side of the device and transmitted through the liquid crystal layer toward the front side. In addition, in the liquid crystal display device, reflecting films for reflecting light incident from the front side of the device toward the front side are arranged on the inner surface of the front-side substrate in correspondence with the areas between the respective pixel areas, thereby making the portions between the respective pixel areas bright and further increasing the overall brightness of the screen.

Description

44074 t A7 B7 五、發明説明() 景 背 之 明 發 (7C 置 装 示 顯 晶 液 之 器0 過 色 彩 有 備 具 於 闢 領有 之明 明發 發本 域 說裝 。 之示面 e)術顧背 1C技晶自 evRa液來 :d相在用 件 2 利 明置 光 ,示 伴顯 元之 示型 顧射 之反 型和 通 ; 0 示 : 顯 有行 者進 知來 W用 ,光 中之 顯反 行有 進置 來配 用側 光面 來背 外其 之在 等 , 光中 明件 照元 内示 室顯 或晶 光液 然之 自型 用射 利反 *在 件。 元示 矩 纯 眞 琿 和 型 陣 。 矩 光源 來有 外有 之含 入包 射中 «件 面元 前示 從顯 射晶 反液 來在 用 , fci rr 冉夕 構另 射 件面 元内 示板 顯基 晶之 液方 之一 式之 方中 陣板 矩基 源對 有一 ,之 如對 例面 ,之 式層 型晶 種液 各夾 等包 型在 陣是 圖面 等内 該之 與板 別基 分之 和方 ,i 極外 電另 素在a 届件 多元 之源 狀有 陣個 矩多 成之 列接 排連 置極 設電 ,素 用 份 部 之 對 面 極 電 素 圖 儷 多 述 上 與 用 利。 ,域 極區 電素 對圖 面成 置形 設來 t請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 對域 一 區 該素 在圈 是1i 件各 元到 示應 顯對 晶別 液分 之置 像設 圖 , 色涸 彩一 示何 顯任 以之 用面 ,内 外之 另板 基 為 因 件 元 示 顯 晶 液 之 器0 a 色 彩 有 備 具 〇 之 器知 濾習 過 , 色是 彩但 之 彩長透 該波之 用定色 利特之 ,該器 器只滹 0 ,過 過光色 色之彩 彩外述 之K上 述域成 上區色 到長著 入波被 射之用 光定利 之特 , 域收過 區吸透 素器光 圖灌之 過過域 透色區 本紙張尺度適用中國國家榇準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 44 074 彳 A7 __B7_ 五、發明説明(> ) 過光用來進行顯示,所Μ對射人光著色後之射出光之強 度變成很弱,不能獲得明亮之顯示為其問題。 另外,為著提高亮度曾考慮使上述之紅,錄,藍之彩 色過漶器之瞑厚變薄,用來減少彩色過濾器對光之吸收 ,藉Μ提高光之透過率用Κ使晝面明亮,但是在此種方 式之使彩色過濾器之膜厚變薄時,因為紅,錄,蓖之各 著色光之吸收波畏區域之透通率亦上升,如第28圈所示 ,會造成各色之光之色平衡之劣化,不能獲得良好之白 顯示為其問題。 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 (請先踔讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 在第28画中顯示有由於彩色遇濾器之薄膜化所產生之 分光透過率之變化。如第28圈所示,透過魟色過濾器之 紅色光之分光分布(實線),使虛媒所示之紅色過濾器之 吸收波長匾域之短波長«之光之透過率變高,和透過綠 色過瀘器和藍色過濾器之錄色光和藍色光之分光分布( 實媒),如虛埭所示,使其半振幅寬度具有變寬之傾向, 其结果是上述混合光之分光率具有在大約5 00 ηι«之 波長附近產生透過率髙峰之特性。因此,使彩色過濾器 之瞑厚變薄之液晶顯示元件因為紅,绿,藍之各謇色光 之吸收波長匾域之透過率進行上升,所Μ各色之纯度( purity)變低。另外,其各色之光之色平衡變劣,烴由 紅,錄,Μ之光之加法混色使顯示色變成接近藍綠(綠 中帶藍>。 如上所述,習知之反射型彩色顧示之液晶顯示元件由 於彩色過濾器對光之吸收而使晝面變暗,即使改善彩色 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4规格(210Χ297公釐)44074 t A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () The bright hair of the back of the scene (7C is equipped with a device that displays crystal liquids. The back 1C technology crystal comes from the evRa liquid: the d phase is in use. 2 The light is used to display the light, which shows the shape of the display element and the inverse shape of the radiation. 0 Shows: The obvious walker comes to know to use W, the light in the light. Retrograde equipment is equipped with side light surface to back it out, etc., the bright light in the light shows the room display or crystal light liquid self-propelled with a sharp reflection * in the piece. The elementary moments are pure 眞 眞 and matrix. The moment light source comes from outside and contains the enveloping shot. «The surface element is shown to be used from the reflection crystal, fci rr Ran Xiguo is another way to display the liquid crystal on the display panel. There is one pair of rectangular bases in the middle array. As for the example, the package type of the layered seed crystals is the sum of the base and the base of the plate. In the source of the multiple components of session a, there are a series of poles arranged in rows, and the poles of the opposite side of the elementary parts are described and used. The electric region of the polar region is placed in the shape of the drawing. Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page.) The Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, printed the element in the region. To the display should be displayed on the crystal liquid component image design, color 涸 color one shows He Xian can be used for the surface, the other inside and outside the board is based on the element to display the crystal liquid device 0 a color has equipment. The device knows the filter, the color is the color but the color is long. The color of the wave is fixed. The device is only 滹 0, and the color of the color K is described above. With the incident wave, the light is used to determine the benefits of light, the area receiving area is absorbed by the absorber light map, and the area is passing through the area. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) 44 074 彳 A7 __B7_ 5. Description of the invention (>) Excessive light is used for display. The intensity of the emitted light after the coloration of the incident light becomes very weak, and it is a problem that a bright display cannot be obtained. In addition, in order to improve the brightness, the thickness of the above-mentioned red, blue, and blue color filters was thinned to reduce the absorption of light by the color filter. By increasing the transmittance of light, the daytime surface was enhanced by κ. Bright, but when the film thickness of the color filter is thinned in this way, the transmittance of the absorption light wave region of each colored light due to red, recorded, and castor also increases, as shown in circle 28, which will cause It is a problem that the color balance of the light of each color is deteriorated, and a good white display cannot be obtained. Printed by Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the reverse side before filling out this page). The 28th picture shows the change in the spectral transmittance caused by the thin film of the color filter. As shown in circle 28, the spectral distribution (solid line) of red light passing through the ocher filter makes the transmittance of light with a short wavelength «in the short wavelength range of the absorption wavelength of the red filter shown in the virtual medium higher, and The spectral distribution (real media) of the color-recording light and blue light passing through the green filter and blue filter, as shown by the virtual frame, tends to widen the half-amplitude width. As a result, the spectral ratio of the above-mentioned mixed light It has a characteristic of generating a transmission peak around a wavelength of about 5 00 ηι «. Therefore, the transmittance of the absorption wavelength plaque range of each color light of red, green, and blue is increased for a liquid crystal display element having a thinner thickness of the color filter, and the purity of each color becomes lower. In addition, the color balance of the light of each color is deteriorated, and the addition of hydrocarbons from red, recorded, and M light causes the display color to be close to blue-green (blue in green). As mentioned above, the conventional reflective color monitor The liquid crystal display element darkens the daytime surface due to the absorption of light by the color filter. Even if the color of the paper is improved, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 × 297 mm) is applied.

V &quot; 440741 μ B7 經濟部中央標準局負工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明(3 ) 1 m m 器 之 吸 收 量 亦 會 使 色 平 衡 變 劣 不 能 進 行 充 分 之 白 1 1 1 顬 示 Q 1 1 [發明之概要] 讀 1 先 1 本 發 明 之 i 的 是 提 供 具 備 有 彩 色 通 濾 器 之 彩 色 液 晶 顯 1 1 1 示 元 件 t 具 有 充 分 之 亮 度 和 良 好 之 色 平 m * 可 顯 示 高 背 之 I 1 品 質 之 彩 色 圓 像 〇 注 I I 用 Μ 達 成 上 述 的 之 本 發 明 之 第 1 態 漾 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 Ψ 項 再 1 1 件 之 構 成 包 含 有 = 填 寫 本 ! 裝 —1 對 之 基 板 1 被 配 置 成 互 相 面 對 I i 1 I 多 m 第 1 霄 極 » 形 成 在 上 述 一 對 之 基 板 之 互 相 面 對 之 1 I 面 之 一 方 S 1 1 至 少 為 1 個 之 第 2 電 極 % 形 成 在 上 述 面 對 之 面 之 另 外 1 訂 —1 方 成 為 與 上 逑 多 個 第 1 電 檯 互 相 面 對 * 用 來 形 成 &gt;x 興 i 上 述 第 1 電 極 面 對 之 區 域 所 界 定 之 多 個 匾 素 區 域 1 著 色 1» 9 被 設 在 上 述 一 對 基 板 之 内 面 之 任 何 方 9 對 1 I 應 到 上 述 之 圖 素 區 域 » 所 具 有 之 面 m 小 於 上 述 圈 素 區 域 1 1 之 面 積 1 和 r 液 晶 曆 9 被 包 夾 在 上 述 —- 對 基 板 之 間 〇 1 | 依 照 本 發 明 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 時 # 在 任 何 — 方 之 基 板 之 1 1 內 面 9 使 對 應 到 圈 素 區 域 之 彩 色 過 薄 器 之 面 小 於 上 述 1 I 團 素 區 域 之 面 積 * 賴 形 成 非 著 色 光 之 射 出 E 域 t 利 用 1 1 I 未 通 過 彩 色 遇 m 器 之 非 著 色 光 和 3 過 上 述 彩 色 過 m 器 之 1 I 著 色 光 用 來 顯 示 1 m 之 圖 素 • 因 為 該 非 著 色 光 是 明 亮 之 1 I 白 色 光 » 所 可 使 各 個 圖 素 之 亮 度 變 高 » 藉 顧 示 明 1 1 5 - l 1 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(21 OX 297公釐) 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印擊 r 44 074 1 A7 B7 五、發明説明(4 ) 亮之彩色圜像。 另外,依照此種液晶顯示元件時,因為具備有反射溝 件用來將從元件前方射人和透過液晶餍之光反射向鲔面 方向,所Μ可以獲得明亮之反射型之彩色液晶頭示元件。 另外,在該液晶顯示元件中.將上述多涠色之彩色« 濾器S置在上述画素區域之除了周缘部外之中央部,使 上述匯素區域之構成包含有形成在其周緣部之非著色光 射出匾域,和形成在其中央部份之著色光射出區域,依 照此種構造之液晶顯示元件時,因為與鄰接之圖素區域 之境是非著色光透過區域,所Μ透遇1個園素區域之光 被設在後面基板側之反射裝置反射,射入到鄰接之另外 一個色之圖素匾域,可以用來減少光吸收。 另外,在該液晶顯示元件中,使上述多僩色之彩色通 逋器小於上述之圜素區域,和從元件前方看時形成畏條 形狀使沿著水平方向之横寬小於與該水平方向正交之方 向之寬度,和/或將上述非著色光射出區域配置成依雄 向排列,用來使透過1届圔素區域之光在透過液晶層後 進行反射,射入到鄰接之另外一個色之圖素區域,所Μ 可以減少光吸收。 另外,在該液晶顯示元件中.使上述之圖素區域在與 表俩基板面平行之面上具備有著色光射出區域,當從元 伴前方看時沿著水平方向之横方向被分割和S置多個著 色膜,分割間之區域胗成依縱向延伸之非著色光射出區 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS &gt; Α4規格(210X297公釐} ----------- 裝------訂------Λ (請先吣讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 44074 1 A7 B7 五、發明説明( ) 域 所 以 可 以 更 進 一 層 的 提 高 彩 色 圖 像 之 亮 度 C % 外 f 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 &gt; 使 上 述 之 圖 素 匾 域 在 舆 基 板 面 平 行 之 面 上 具 備 有 箸 色 光 射 出 匾 域 9 當 從 元 件 前 方 看 時 沿 箸 水 平 方 向 之 縱 方 向 被 分 割 和 配 箸 多 傾 著 色 腠 9 藉 以 在 表 m 基 板 面 形 成 依 水 平 方 向 延 伸 之 非 着 色 光 射 出 區 域 9 所 以 可 以 以 髙 亮 度 反 射 從 上 m 射 入 到 表 m 基 板 面 之 光 0 另 外 9 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 » 被 配 置 在 上 述 _ 素 匾 域 内 之 上 逑 箸 色 膜 在 從 前 方 看 時 之 水 平 方 向 9 毎 摘 色 被 配 置 之 位 置 在 輿 上 述 水 平 方 向 正 交 之 方 向 産 生 福 移 * 利 用 這 種 方 式 可 以 以 高 亮 度 有 效 的 反 射 從 上 下 方 向 射 入 到 表 細 基 板 面 之 光 和 從 左 右 方 向 射 入 之 光 〇 外 » 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 9 在 上 述 表 m 基 板 之 内 面 設 有 反 射 構 件 9 對 應 到 各 傾 圖 素 區 域 之 間 之 圓 素 間 區 域 用 來 將 來 自 元 件 前 方 之 射 入 光 再 度 的 反 射 到 前 方 1 經 由 增 強 來 自 各 個 圖 素 U 域 之 間 之 部 份 之 反 射 光 強 度 9 可 以 更 進 一 步 的 提 高 盡 面 全 體 之 亮 度 〇 本 發 明 之 第 2 態 樣 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 是 在 上 述 之 第 1 態 樣 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 使 上 述 之 箸 色 膜 之 構 成 包 含 有 : 用 以 讓 可 視 光 區 域 中 之 中 間 波 長 匾 域 之 光 透 過 之 著 色 膜 用 以 讓 長 波 長 區 域 之 光 透 過 之 箸 色 膜 $ 和 用 以 讓 短 波 長 區 域 之 光 透 遇 之 著 色 膜 所 具 有 之 膜 厚 是 其 各 棋 依 照 7 - 上 述 之 顒 序 變 厚 ) 和 使 色 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標隼(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 44 074 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作杜印製 五、發明説明( ^) 1 箸 色 膜 之 色 座 標 所 包 圍 之 色 範 圍 (( :0 ] or ί ! a bu 1 )成為最 I 1 大 〇 1 1 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 &gt; 被 配 置 在 國 素 區 域 之 由 3 色 構 5' 1 先 1 成 之 彩 色 過 濾 器 之 膜 厚 被 設 定 成 在 可 視 光 匾 域 中 9 長 波 閱‘ 讀 1 長 匾 域 透 過 箸 色 膜 之 厚 度 大 於 中 間 波 長 區 域 透 過 箸 色 膜 背 面 1 I 之 1 之 厚 度 &gt; 和 短 波 長 區 域 透 過 著 色 膜 之 厚 度 大 於 長 間 波 長 注 意 1 I 區 域 透 過 箸 色 膜 之 厚 度 &gt; 透 遇 各 m 箸 色 膜 之 箸 色 光 可 以 事 項 1 I 再 \ 擴 大 能 夠 顯 示 之 色 範 圍 (c 〇 1 0 Γ % an υ t ), 色平衡不會劣 填 寫 本 装 化 » 可 以 使 畫 面 非 常 明 亮 〇 因 此 &gt; 可 以 以 廣 大 範 圍 之 色 頁 — 1 I 範 圍 進 行 彩 色 顯 示 〇 1 1 另 外 9 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 9 上 逑 之 箸 色 膜 是 红 » 緣 f 1 藍 之 3 色 (P r i m a ry C ο 1 0 Γ )之彩色過濾器, 上述各色 1 訂 之 彩 色 過 濾 器 所 具 有 之 膜 厚 是 使 該 彩 色 過 濾 器 之 上 述 色 1 範 圍 (c 〇 1 0 Γ g a 1 Ut )之面積在CIEu 1 9 7 6 L 本a * b 本 C 0 1 〇 r I sy s t e通 之 a* b * 面 上 成 為 7 5 0以上, 用來擴大可顯示之色 \ 範 圍 L ( C 0 1 〇 Γ ga 9 U t) 9 色 平 衡 不 會 劣 化 » 可 以 使 盡 面 非 1 1 常 明 亮 0 1 I 另 外 t 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 &gt; 上 述 各 僑 之 彩 色 遇 濾 器 1 f 所 具 有 之 膜 厚 是 使 透 過 上 述 各 値 之 彩 色 過 濾 器 之 箸 色 光 1 1 之 m 合 光 { c ο 1 or Η i X in g ) 之 色 度 (c hr 0 9 a ) 在C I Ε 1 976 1 t a本 b* C ο 1 or S y s t e I 之 a * b * 面 上 成 為 1 . 5以下之值, m 1 1 以 實 現 色 平 衡 良 好 之 色 顯 示 〇 1 1 另 外 9 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 &gt; 上 述 各 色 之 彩 色 過 濾 器 1 I 由 使 用 有 顔 料 分 散 材 料 之 紅 色 8 - 9 線 色 1 和 Μ 色 之 彩 色 過 1 1 1 1 1 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家標率(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 44 074 1 A7 B7 經濟部t央標準局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明( 7 ) 1 1 濾 器 所 構 成 S 經 由 將 膜 厚 設 定 成 紅 色 過 濾 器 之 膜 厚 為 0.9 1 1 1 · 1 β \ 1, 綠 色 過 濾 器 之 膜 厚 為 0 . 8 - -1 • 1 Μ a , 和藍色 1 1 過 濾 器 之 膜 厚 為 1 . 卜1 .i μ a , 可以滿足上述之色範圍 請 1 先 1 和 混 合 光 之 色 度 之 條 件 〇 讀 1 % 外 , 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 經 由 使 上 述 各 色 之 彩 色 背 面 1 | 之 1 過 濾 器 分 別 具 有 不 同 之 面 積 率 和 其 各 m 對 圖 素 區 域 之 注 意 1 I 面 積 率 是 依 照 用 以 譲 中 間 波 長 區 域 之 光 透 遇 之 箸 色 膜 1 举 項 1 1 再 用 以 讓 短 波 長 區 域 之 光 透 過 之 箸 色 膜 * 和 用 以 讓 長 波 長 填 寫 j. 1 ά I I 區 域 之 光 透 遇 之 著 色 膜 之 顒 序 y 順 序 的 變 大 可 以 使 色 本 頁 -s_k· 範 圍 和 色 平 衡 更 加 良 好 0 1 1 另 外 t 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 &gt; 經 由 使 上 述 各 色 之 彩 色 1 1 過 濾 器 分 別 具 有 红 色 為 0 · 9〜1 .2 Μ 通》 緣色為0 .8 1 . 1 ^ « 1 訂 9 和 藍 色 為 1 . 1 Λ -1 .4 Μ B之膜厚, 和對上逑園素s域分別 1 具 有 紅 色 為 90 9 5%, 绦色為6 0〜6 5* » 和 藍 色 為 7 5 80 2 1 | 之 面 稹 率 * 可 以 使 色 範 圍 和 色 平 衡 更 加 良 好 〇 1 本 發 明 之 第 3 態 樣 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 是 在 上 逑 之 第 1 態 I 1 樣 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 使 上 述 之 液 晶 層 被 設 定 成 : 泉 I 在 對 應 到 形 成 有 上 述 箸 色 膜 之 區 域 具 有 第 1 液 晶 層 厚 1 1 dl 和 1 1 在 對 應 到 形 成 有 上 述 著 色 膜 之 區 域 以 外 之 其 他 區 域 具 1 | 有 第 2 液 晶 層 厚 d2 1 1 該 等 液 晶 層 厚 d 1 ,d 2和上述液晶層之ff ί射率異方性△ η 1 1 之 積 之 值 △ η d 1和 △ nd2被設定成使透過具有上述積之 1 I 值 △ n d 1之液晶元β :之光和透過具有上述積之值Δη -9 - d 2之 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家摞準(CNS &gt; A4規格(2】0X 297公釐) 44074 t A7 B7 經濟部中央螵準局員工消費合作社印« 五、發明説明 ( ί ) 1 液 晶 元 件 之 光 之 各 個 之 分 光 透 遇 率 分 布 合 成 後 之 分 光 透 1 1 過 率 分 布 * 在 可 視 光 波 長 區 域 實 霣 上 成 為 平 坦 之 值 〇 1 1 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 * 锂 由 使 通 過 具 有 Δ ndl之液晶 請 1 先 ί 元 件 之 光 和 透 遇 具 有 上 述 積 之 值 △ nd2之液晶元件之光 讀 1 1 之 各 個 之 分 光 透 過 宰 分 布 合 成 後 之 分 光 η 治 率 分 布 在 背 面 1 1 之 ί 可 視 光 波 畏 區 域 實 質 上 成 為 平 坦 之 值 » 可 Η 射 出 具 有 平 意 1 I 坦 之 波 長 分 布 之 光 〇 事 項 1 1 另 外 審 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 » 使 上 述 矚 素 區 域 內 之 對 填 寫 本 裝 應 到 彩 色 通 m 器 之 區 域 成 為 有 過 m 器 區 域 和 使 未 對 應 頁 S_«· 1 I 到 上 述 彩 色 過 m 器 之 區 域 成 為 無 瀘 器 區 域 » 當 被 钽 夾 1 1 在 一 對 基 板 之 間 之 液 晶 曆 之 廣 厚 為 d, 多 折 射 率 為 △ η , 1 1 和 其 積 為 △ n d時 • 在 一 俚 匾 素 區 域 内 存 在 具 有 不 同 之 - I 訂 Δ n c 之 上 述 有 過 濾 器 區 域 和 上 述 無 遇 濾 器 匾 域 之 情 況 9 1 經 由 適 當 的 m 擇 液 晶 層 之 層 厚 使 該 等 通 過 光 之 分 光 透 過 1 率 之 不 同 進 行 互 相 補 償 赘 可 Μ 使 晝 面 很 明 亮 和 可 顯 1 Tfx 色 平 衡 良 好 之 彩 色 圖 像 〇 1 1 另 外 « 在 該 液 晶 顗 示 元 件 中 &gt; 使 液 晶 餍 之 Δ n d 之 值 變 Λ 1 化 * 當 Μ dO表 示 透 遇 率 為 最 大 值 之 液 晶 層 厚 時 , 經 由 滿 I I 足 1 ί △ ndl&lt;A ndO&lt;A nd2 1 I 之 闢 像 適 當 的 選 擇 液 晶 層 之 暦 厚 使 該 等 透 過 光 之 分 光 ί 1 1 透 過 率 之 不 同 進 行 互 相 補 償 * 可 使 畫 面 很 亮 9 和 可 以 1 1 顯 示 色 平 衡 良 好 之 彩 色 圖 像 〇 1 I 本 發 明 之 第 4 態 樣 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 是 在 上 述 之 第 1 m 1 1 10 1 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2)0X29*7公釐) 44 074 A7 B7 經濟部中央橾準局員工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明( 1 ) 1 樣 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 更 具 備 有 1 1 第 1 和 第 2 定 向 膜 分 別 設 在 上 述 之 一 對 基 板 之 内 面 i 1 &gt; 和 請 1 先 I —- 對 之 偏 槿 光 板 * 被 配 置 在 上 述 —- 對 基 板 之 外 m 形 讀 1 成 包 夾 該 等 基 板 Ϊ 背 面 1 | 之 1 設 在 光 射 入 拥 之 前 面 m 基 板 之 第 1 定 向 膜 » 在 從 正 面 注 意 1 I 看 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 時 之 水 平 方 向 作 為 基 準 在 轉 0。 5· 事 項 i 1 再 \ 之 範 圍 内 » 被 施 加 定 向 處 理 J 設 在 輿 上 述 前 面 m 基 板 面 % 本 裝 對 之 背 面 侧 之 基 板 之 第 2 定 向 膜 &gt; 依 照 對 上 述 第 1 定 向 頁 s_- 1 I 膜 之 定 向 處 理 方 向 形 成 90&quot; 之 交 叉 方 向 &gt; 被 施 加 定 向 處 ! 1 理 〇 1 | 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 9 使 液 晶 單 元 之 背 側 基 板 之 近 傍 1 訂 之 液 晶 分 子 之 定 向 方 向 成 為 從 前 面 方 向 看 時 對 顯 示 面 之 1 横 軸 形 成 在 轉 大 於 0° 小於4 5° 之角度範圍内之方向, 液 I 晶 分 子 地 俄 扭 轉 定 向 其 扭 轉 角 是 以 上 述 背 m 基 板 之 近 傍 之 定 向 方 向 作 為 基 準 當 從 背 側 基 板 朝 向 表 倒 基 板 白 前 方 I 1 看 時 成 為 右 轉 大 致 9 0 〇 9 利 用 這 種 方 式 I 即 使 是 反 射 型 Λ 1 之 TN液 晶 顯 示 元 件 從 通 常 之 觀 察 方 向 觀 察 到 之 顯 示 亦 1 1 可 以 確 保 具 有 足 夠 之 反 襯 (C on tr as t) 和 充 分 之 亮 度 〇 1 1 另 外 % 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 ♦ 上 述 液 晶 層 之 上 述 背 面 1 I 側 基 板 近 傍 之 液 晶 分 子 因 為 使 其 定 向 方 向 成 為 從 上 述 * 的 1 1 面 側 基 板 看 時 對 上 述 水 平 方 向 左 轉 5。 - 3 0 ΰ 之角度範 1 1 圍 内 之 方 向 9 所 以 可 以 更 加 明 亮 0 另 外 f 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 1 I 元 件 中 1 上 述 液 晶 層 之 上 述 背 面 制 基 板 近 傍 之 液 晶 分 子 1 I -1 1 - 1 1 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS } A4規格(210 X 297公釐) Γ 經濟部中央橾隼局員工消費合作社印製 4407 4 J A7 B7 五、發明説明(丨C ) 因為使其定向方向成為從上述前面餹基板看時對上述水 平方向左轉大約10°〜25&quot;之角度範圍内之方向,所以 可以更加明亮。 [附圖之簡要說明] 第1圖是平面圖,用來表示本發明之第1實施例之液 晶顯示元件。 第2圖是沿著第1圏之II -II線之剖面圓。 第3圖是沿著第1匾之ffl-m線之剖面圈。 第4匾是剖面画,用來表示第1實施例之液晶顯示元 件之圖素和彩色過濾器之排列。 第5圖表示第1實施例之液晶頴示元件之彩色過嫌器 之膜厚和色度(chroia)之蘭偽。 第6圖表示第1實施例之液晶顯示元件之彩色過濾器 之膜厚和色範圍(color gaaut)之闢係。 第7團表示第 1實施例之液晶顯示元件之彩色過濾器 之膜厚和混合光之chroma之闋傜。 第8圖表示第1實施例之液晶顯示元件之彩色過濾器 之膜厚和亮度(lightness)之關係。 第9圖是第1實施例之液晶顯示元件在CIE 1976 L * a * b * c ο 1 〇 r s y s t e μ 上之待性圃。 第Id A圖〜第IOC圖是色特性圖,分別用來表示色範圍 ,色度,和亮度與第1實施例之掖晶顯示元件之彩色過 濾器之膜厚之關偽^ 第11A圖〜第11C圖是色待性圖,分別用來表示色範圍 -1 2 - \請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(210XM7公釐) 44 07 4 1 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明(il ) ,色度,和亮度與第1實施例之液晶顯示元件之彩色過 濾器之面積率之關傺。 第12 A圖〜第12C圖是色待性分別用來表示色範圍 ,色度,和亮度與第 1實施例之液晶顯示元件之彩色過 濾器之膜厚之關傜。 第13A圖〜第13C圖是色特性圖,分別用來表示色範圍 ,色度,和亮度與第1實施例之液晶顯示元件之彩色過 濾器之面積率之關像。 第14圖表示第1實施例之液晶顯示元件之△ nd和透過 率之關俗。 第15圔擴大顯示第14圖之一部份之擴大圖β 第16圖表示分別透過第1實施例之液晶顯示元件之有 過濾器區域和無過濾器區域之光之分光透過率分布。 第17圖表示第1實施例之液晶顯示元件之光透過率分 布。 第18圖是斜視圖,用來分解的顯示第1實施例之液晶 顯示元件之概略構造。 第19_是斜視_,用來分解的顯示第1實施例之液晶 顯示元件之概略構造。 第20圖是平面圖,用來表示第2實施例之液晶顯示元 件之圖素和彩色過濾器之排列。 第21圖是平面圖,用來表示第2實施例之液晶顯示元 件之變化例中之圖素和彩色過濾器之排列。 第22圖是平面圖,用來表示第2實施例之液晶顯示元 -1 3 - ^^1 nn ^^^1 - - ml ^^^1 n^i ^ J1 J3 、\=tl t請先盹讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家梯準(CNS &gt; A4说格(2丨Ο X 297公釐) 44 07 d 1 A7 B7 五、發明説明(^ ) 經濟部中央梯準局員工消费合作社印掣 元元元 元元光 示 之Γ, 源明 示 示 示 示 示 分 顯 份第H有形透 顧 顧 頭 顯 顯 與 晶 部。面 為等有 晶 晶 晶 晶 晶 化 液 一團平 β板設 液 液 液 液 液 變 之 之Jffi是 體璃面 。之 之 之 之 之 厚 例 件slnffl晶玻內 列例 例 例 例 例 0 施 元Ui4電f 之 排胞 » 豳 腌 豳 之 實 示U第 膜板2 之實 實 實 實 賨 器 之 顯-HBI,。 薄基板 器 3 4 5 6 7 嫌 明 晶 E0 列 T 之基 滤第 第 第 第。第 過 發 液之Jffi排TF對側 過示 示 示 示列示 色 本 之匾 U 之以一背 色表 表 表 表排表 彩 明 明1U 器是其在 彩來 來 來 來之來 之B1說 發第 U瀘件在 , 和用 用 用 用器用 術 Μ來 本著-1¾元,中 素, , , ,滤, 技 g 用 示沿 B 色示者之 圖匾 圖 圃 窗過圖 知ϊ¥圈 表是之彩顯型,2 之面 面 面 面色面 習。 附 Μ 匾圈和晶陣)1 中剖 剖 剖 平彩剖 示¼照 1用21素液矩板 例是 是 是 是和是 表闞 參 例是第第圖之源基 化3η4η圖 圖素圄 圔之實將 施圈,著示明有明 變23242526圖2728率 面。篱1圖沿表發之透 之第。第。第。第之第。第過 下置il第面是來本件之 件 件 件 伴 件 件 透 t 裝 t 平匾用 元成 (請先盹讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度速用中國國家榇準(cns ) A4说格(2丨〇 X 297公釐) 經濟部中央橾準局員工消費合作社印裂 41:, Ο T 4- Τ'- Α7 Β7五、發明説明(β) 之圖素電棰3被排列成矩陣狀,和設有分別建接到該圏 素電搔3之由多値TFT形成之有源元件(以下稱為TFT)4e 上述之TFT4之構成包含有:形成在背嫌基板2上之閛 極電掻5和電容形成電極12;覆蓋在該等閘棰電極5和 電容形成電搔12之閛搔絶緣膜6;在該閘ffi絶緣膜6之上 形成與上述閘搔電極5面對之i型半導體膜7:和經由摻 雜有不純物之η型半導體膜(圓中未顯示)形成在該i型 半導體膜7之源極,汲棰區域上之葱極電棰8和汲極電 棰9。 另外,在上逑之背销基板2上,分別沿著各個圃素電 榷列之一倒,配置有閛掻線10用來對各列之TFT4供給閘 極信號,各列之TFT4之閘槿電棰5分別與對應到該列之 閘極線1 Q形成一體。 另外,上述之TFT4之閛搔絶緣膜(透明膜&gt;6形成大致 跨越在基板1之全面,上逑之閛棰線10除了其端子部外 ,均被閘極絶緣膜6覆蓋。 另外,在上述之閛極絶緣膜6上,分別沿著各傾圖素 電極行之一侧,S線有資料線11用來對各行之各摘TFT4 供給資料信號,各行之TFT4之汲棰電極9分別舆對應到 該行之資料線1 1建接。 在本實施例中,將資料線11配置在上述之閛極絶緣膜 6上,各行之T F T 4之汲極電極9分別與對應到該行之資 料線1 1形成一體。 另外,上述之圖素電棰3是形成在上述之μ極絶綈膜 -1 5- - - - -I ^^^1 I ^^^1 ^^^1 1.^1 I— J n ^^^1 ^ιτ ‘(請先¾讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙伕尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210XM7公釐} 44 074 t B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印聚 五、發明説明 () 1 6 上 9 該 圓 素 霣 極 3 在 其 一側緣之端部埋接到 對應 之 1 1 I TFT4 之 源 極 霄 掻 8 0 I 1 另 外 9 在 該 背 側 基 板 2 之内面,Μ覆蓋上述 之TFT4和 請 1 先 1 資 科 m 11 及 匾 素 電 m 3 之 周緣部之方式,設有 塗覆 涵 緣 讀 1 膜 13 , 在 其 上 形 成 有 定 向 膜14。 背 面 ί I 之 1 另 外 一 方 面 » 在 作 為 顯 示面之表側基板1之 内面 設 有 注 意 ! 事 1 多 色 (例如, 紅, 錄, Μ之3色)之彩色過漶器 15R , 15G , 項 再 1 15B, 分刖對應到上述背俩基板2之各届圔素電極3 ,另 填 寫 本 裝 外 » 在 上 述 之 彩 色 遇 濾 器 間之區域形成有黑罩 幕16 f 使 頁 1 I 透 明 之 保 護 絕 緣 膜 17形 成 覆蓋在該黑罩幕16, 在該 保 護 1 1 絕 緣 膜 17上 設 有 透 明 之 面 對電極18形成®對上 述之 圖 素 I 1 電 極 3 之 全 部 1 利 用 該 面 對電極18與上述之圖 素電 極 3 1 訂 之 互 相 面 對 之 部 份 用 來 形 成圖素區域Α。 1 另 外 t 經 由 遘 當 的 選 擇 彩色過®器15R , 15G , 15B之材 I 質 可 Μ 省 略 上 述 之 保 護 膜 (絕緣膜)。 1 I 上 述 之 彩 色 過 濾 器 1 5R , 15G,15B在列方向和行方向, 分 1 1 別 Μ 等 間 RS ΓΤΠ t 依 照 紅 色 遇 濾器15R,綠色過濾器156 &gt; 藍 X 1 色 過 瀘 器 15B之順序交替的排列,該等彩色過濾器15R 1 1 1 5G , 1 5 Β分別對應到不同之圖素區域Α。 1 f 各 個 色 之 該 等 彩 色 過 m 器15115G,15B之大小是所具 1 I 有 之 面 積 小 於 上 述 各 個 圈 素電極3和面對電極 1δ之 面 對 1 1 之 圄 素 區 域 之 面 樓 * 在 本 實施例中,將各色之 彩色 過 m 1 1 器 1 5R , 1 5G . 15B設置成對應到各個圖素區域之除了屑 緣 部 外 之 內 脚 之 區 域 〇 - 1 -1 6 - 1 1 1 1 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家標率(CMS ) A4現格(210X297公釐) 經濟部中央梯準局貝工消費合作社印聚 44074 1 A7 B7五、發明説明(β ) 另外,上述之表側基板1和背«基板2經由画中未顯 示之框狀密封材料產生接合,液晶LC充填到該兩涸基板 1,2間之被上述密封材料包圔之區域。 另外,被設在上述一對基板1,2之内面之定膜(由聚醯 亞胺等形成之水平定向膜)19,14,經由對其膜面進行摩 擦用來腌加指定方向之定向處理。被充填在該兩屆基板 1,2間之液晶LC,經由表供基板1之定向_19和背側基板 2之定向膜14被限制在基板1,2之近傍之液晶分子之定向 方向,在該兩個基板1,2之間,Μ指定之扭轉角(例如大 約9 0 ° )被扭轉定向。 另外,在上述之一對基板1,2之外面分別酝置有偏極 光板21.22,該等儎極光板21,22被設置成使其光學袖(透 遇抽或吸收袖)朝向指定方向之狀態。 另外,在背面側之偏極光板22之背後,配置有反射構 件23,用來反射從前面側射入到液晶顯示元件和透過液 晶層之外來光。該反射構件23由白色之散亂反射板所構 成0 該液晶顯示元件是利用外來光進行顯示之反射型者, 在從前面側透過表側偏極光板21射入到各個圖素區域A 之光(直媒偏極光)之中,除了該圖素區域A之周緣部外, 透過內側區域之光射入到與該圖素匾域A對應之彩色過 漶器15R,15G,15B,利用該彩色濾波器吸收其吸收波長區 域之光,用來著色成上述彩色漶波器之色,該著色光順 序的透過液晶層和背側偏極光板22後被反射構件23反射 -17- (諳先Μ·讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS &gt; Α4規格(210X 297公釐) J ------- 經濟部中央標準局負工消费合作社印^ 4 4 07 4 1 a7 B7五、發明説明(4 ) ,顒序的透逢上述之背側偏極光板22,液晶層,彩色過 滤器.和表側偏極光板21後射出到前面側。 另外,在射人到上述各個圖素區域A之光之中,其射 人到該匾素區域A之周緣部,亦即射人到上述彩色過濾 器15R,15G,15B之外期(之區域之光,不會通過彩色過滹器 ,顒序的透遴液晶層和背側儸槿光板22後被反射構件23 反射,順序的透過上述之背側偏極光板22,液晶層,和 表俩鴒槿光板21後射出到前面側。 依照此種液晶顧示元件時,因為彩色過濾器1 5 R , 1 5 G , 15B之面積小於圖素區域A之面積,所Μ只有通過圈素區 域Α之光中之射人到上述彩色過濾器15R,15B,15B之光, 被彩色過漶器吸收其吸收波長區域之光因而被著色,其 他之光不被彩色過a器吸收,以高度亮度之非著色光直 接透過,Μ該非著色光和上述之著色光用來顯示彩色圖 素。 另外,在使白顯示比黑顯示明亮為優先之情況時,經 由省略被配置在圖素區域Α間之黒罩幕16,可以使射入 光經常被上述之敗亂反射板23,閘極線10,和資料線11 等反射,射出到元件前方,用以形成明亮顯示區域W,藉 以獲得明亮之顯示。 第4匾是平面圖,用來表示第1實胞例之液晶顧示元 件之圖素和彩色過滹器之排列。該画素區域A如第4圖 所示,其周緣部之構成包含有:非著色光射出區域b (反 射構件23之色為白之區域用來讓高亮度之未著色之光 ^ils I. ^^^1 n* ^i^lr -° _(請先M.讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS &gt; A4说格(2丨0X297公釐) 44 07 4 1 A7 B7 五、發明説明() (請先Η-·讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 透過;和著色光射出區域a,用來該被著色成位於中央部 之彩色»波器之色之光透過,該圈素區域A用來讓分別透 過上述之著色光射出區域a和非著色光射出區域b之光绲 合,當作1個之彩色顯示圓素的範圍。 因此,依照上述之液晶顯示元件,所顯示之顯示圖素 被著色成彩色過濾器15R,15G,15B之色,而且亮度很高。 因此,依照該液晶顯示元件,即使為反射型,Μ反射構 件23反射從其前面射入之外來光藉以進行顯示時,亦 可以顯示十分明亮之彩色圖像。 另外,在反射型之液晶顯示元件中,當射人到圖素區 域Α之邊緣部附近之光被反射溝件反射,透過相鄹之圖 素區域之邊緣部附近藉K進行射出之情況時,在習知之 液晶顬示元件中,因為彩色過滤器對應到圖素區域之全 體,所以射人到圃素區域之邊緣部附近之光被著色成為 該圈素區域之彩色遇滹器之色,被反射構件反射而射入 到相鄘之匾素區域之邊緣部附近之光,因為被該®接之 彩色過滹器吸收,不會射出到顯示元件之前面,所以顯 示圖素變暗。 經濟部中央椋準局員工消費合作社印掣 色彡著區未此 彩9T&gt;非素部因 為,以圈嫌 , 因積光之周過 ,面之鄰之透 時之近相域 Μ 件 W 附到區可 元i 部入素 , 畐 示 緣射圖收 顯« 使之吸 圈 晶其即接被 液、到光鄰會 之W人該在不 例 δ 射,為Κ 施 ΜΑ,此因所 實 Β 域因 ., 述15區。時器 上G,素射近漶 照15圈反附過 依R,涸被部色 -15! 態緣彩 是器何狀邊有 但濾任之之成 過在色域肜 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公釐) &quot;4407 4 1 A7 B7 五、發明説明(β ) 從顙示元件之前面射出之光之亮度不會降低β 另外,在上述之實施例中,圔素匾域是形成赶似四角 形,但是並不只限於這種方式,亦可以使上述之圓素區 域形成實質上之椭圓形或圖形,經由使彩色過濾器15R, 15G,15B之外形之長度小於該四角形,可以用來缩短沿 箸其周緣所産生之階梯之長度,藉以防止由於階梯部份 之液晶分子之定向狀態之混亂産生漏光造成反襯之降低β 另外,在上述之實施例中是使彩色遇濾器15R,15G,15B 形成在設有面對電掻17之基板1,但是也可以形成在設有 圖素電極3之基板2〇 在上述之第1實施例中,上述之彩色過濾器以使用有 顔料分散材料之彩色過浦器形成,當以t(R&gt;表示能讓上 述紅,綠,Μ之彩色過濾器15R,15G,15B中之長波長區 域之光透過之紅色過濾器15 R之膜厚,以t(G)表示能讓 中間波長匾域之光透過之缘色過濂器15B之膜厚,和以t (B)表示能讓短波長區域之光透過之藍色過濾器15B之膜 厚時,刖設定成能諶足t(G)&lt;t(R)&lt;t(B)之商僳之方式。 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 〆請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 透過該等彩色過濾器所産生之箸色光之色之色度C* (chroma)隨箸該等彩色過濾器之膜厚而變化,其箩化方 式如第5圖所示〇 第5圖表示當使上述之彩色過濾器之膜厚t(R&gt;,t(6), t(B)變化時,透過红,緣,藍之各僱色之彩色過濾器15R ,15G,15B之箸色光在 CIE 1976 L*a*b*color systeB上之 色度C*之變化。上述之色度C*表示從CIE 1976 -2 0 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2丨0 X 297公釐) 44 07 4 1 A7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印繁 B7五、發明説明() color syste»上之a*b*面上之C光源(a* = 0, b* = 0之無 彩色點)到紅,緣,藍之各個箸色光之色座樣點之距離 。如該圏所示,各摘著色光之色度C*對於彩色過濾器之 膜厚之變化分別具有最大值,用以表示該等最大值之各 色之彩色過濾器之膜厚具有 t(G)&lt;t(R)&lt;t (B) 之關僳,用以表示該等最大值之各色之彩色過濾器之険 厚分別在 紅色過濂器膜厚t(R)=0.9〜1.2;u 緣色過濾器膜厚t ( G &gt; = 0 · 8〜1 . 1 # * 藍色過濾器膜厚t(B) = l.l〜1.4# 1 之範圍β 因此,經由將該等彩色過濾器1 5 Ιϊ , 1 5 S,1 5 Β之膜厚t ( R ) ,t&lt;G),t(B)分別設定成為用以表示透過該彩色過濾器 之箸色光之色度(C*)為最大值之膜厚,可以使CIE 1976 L*a*b* color system上之a*b*面上之上述3掴著色光 之色座標點所包圍之面積(亦卽色範圍 &gt; 變大,可以顯示 更多之色。 第6囫〜第8圖表示利用來自上述圖素區域A之過濾 器對應區域a之射出光之著色光,和來自非著色光射出 區域b之射出光之非箸色光,以透過各色之圖素區域之 光之混合光所顯示之顯示色在CIE 1976 L*a*b* color system上之特性之變化(隨著各色之彩色過濂器之膜厚 而變化)。其中,所示之待性是各色之彩色過濾器15R, -2 1 - (請先g讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準{ CNS ) A4規格(2丨0 X 297公釐) 44074 ί Α7 Β7 經滴部中央標孪局負Η消費合作社印繁 五、發明説明() 15G,15B之面積均為圔素區域A之面積之80¾時之特性。 第6圖表示色範圍,第7鬮表示各色之色度(chrona), 第8圈表示亮度之變化特性。 在第6圖所示之特性中, 實線是綠和藍2色之彩色過漶器15G,15B之膜厚t(G), t ( B )分別固定為1 . 5 w a ,只使紅色過濾器1 5 R之膜厚t ( R ) 進行變化時, 鍵線是紅和齄2色之彩色過瀘器15R.15B之膜厚t(R), t(G)分別固定為1.5w a,只使綠色過濾器15B之膜厚t(G) 進行變化時, 虛線是紅和綠2之色之彩色過濾器15R,15G之膜厚t(R) ,t(G)分別固定為1.5W a,只使藍色過濾器15B之膜厚 t (B)進行變化時。 如該第6圖之過濾器膜厚——色範園特性所示,各備彩 色過濾器之膜橥在紅色過濾器之膜厚t(R)=0.9〜 ,綠色遇滹器膜厚t ( G ) = 0 . 8〜1 . 1 W b , Μ色過滅器膜厚 t(B)=l.l〜1.4ua之範圍,上述之色範画具有最大值。 第7圈之實線所示之特性是綠和藍2色之彩色過®器 15G.15B之膜厚t(G),t&lt;B)分別固定為1.5w m,只使紅色 過濾器15R之膜厚t(R)進行變化時之特性, 鐽線所示之特性是紅和藍2色之彩色過»器15R,15B 之膜厚t(R),t(B)分別固定為只使綠色過滅器 15G之膜厚t(G&gt;進行變化時之特性, 虛線所示之特性是紅和綠2色之彩色過逋器15R,UG -22- !— SI — ί - 1^1 I - -- , -- - -- I ——! J^i {請先閱_讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ 297公釐) 經滴部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印繁 r 4407 4 1 A7 B7五、發明説明(&gt;〇 2_-t(R),t(G&gt;分別固定為1.5u ».只使藍色過濾器 15B之膜厚t(B)進行變化時之特性。 如該第7圖之過濾器膜厚一色度特性所示,當過薄器 瞋厚分別為紅色過溏器膜厚t(R)=0.9〜1.2μ b,綠色遇 濾器膜厚t(G)=0.8〜1.1/i 藍色過濾器膜厚UB)=1.1 〜1,4/iB之範圍時,上逑混合光之色度C*躭變成較小之 值0 另外,當上述混合光之色度為較小之值時,該混合光 之色接近 CIE 1976 color* systea 之 面之 C 光源,上述混合光之色變成無色彩之良好之白色光。 另外,在第8圈中 實烺所示之特性是綠和藍2色之彩色過濾器15G,15B 之膜厚t(G),UB&gt;分別固定為1.5ub,只使紅色遇滅器15R 之膜厚t(R)進行變化時之持性, 鐽堞所示之特性是紅和藍2色之彩色遇滹器15ϋ,15Β 之膜厚t(R),t(B)分別固定為1.5β a,只使綠色過濾器 15G之膜厚t(G)進行變化時之特性, 虛線所示之特性是紅和綠2色之彩色通滤器15R,15G 之膜厚UR},t(G)分別固定為1.5w b,只使藍色過漶器 15B之膜厚UB)進行變化時之特性。 如第8圖之過濾器膜厚一亮度特性所示,紅,綠,藍 之彩色過濾器15R,15G,15B之膜厚UR),t(G),t(B&gt;分別 為上述範圍(Ί(ϋ)=0.9〜1.2/ί 111,1:(0)=0.8〜l.lw π,, t(B)=l.l〜1.4w m)時之混合光之亮度(L*)大約為51〜 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度遶用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2] 0 X 297公釐) 經滴部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 44 074 1 A7 B7五、發明説明(^ ) 5 3之範園,假如有此種程度之亮度(L Ο時,躭具有充分 之顬示亮度。 另外,上述之混合光之亮度(L *)會隨著過«器膜厚之 變薄而變髙,但是當遇濾器膜厚變薄時,著色光之色度 會因而降低,使色範團變狭,所Κ紅,綠,藍之彩色過 濾器15R,15G,15B之膜厚t(R&gt;,t(G),t(B)最好在上述之 範圍。 另外,在上述之實施例中是使用彩色過漶器作為著色 膜,但是上述之著色膜並不只限於使用彩色通濾器。另 外,上述實施例之液晶顧示元件是利用紅,綠,藍之光 之加法混色用來顯示彩色圖像,但是也可«用於利用具 備有紫紅,黃,和藍綠3色之著色_ (例如彩色過濾器) 之減法混合甩來顧示彩色圖像之液晶鼷示元件,在這種 情況時,使3色之著色膜之膜厚具有長波畏區域透過著 色膜〈中間波長區域透過著色膜〈短波長匾域透過著色膜 之翮係,和將上述3色之著色膜之膜厚設定為透過各個 著色膜之著色光之色度大致成為最大之值,用來使所具 備之上述著色膜具有寬度之色範園和不會產生色平衡之 劣化,藉Μ使畫面具有充分之亮度。 另外,為著提高色平衡,所Μ彩色過濾器之面積Μ下 述方式設定。 第 9 臑表示在 CIE 1976 color systeia 之 面上之本第〗實施例之液晶顯示元件之紅色光,綠色光 ,藍色光之各個之座標。 _(請先軋讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 經滴部中央標準局員工消費合作社印t 4 4 074 1 a? B7 五、發明説明(W ) 該液晶顔示元件之彩色過濾器之膜厚和面積是設定成 使透過紅色過濾器15R之紅色光之色座標RC,和透過綠 色過漶器1 5 G之绿色之色座禰G C ,及透過藍色過濾器1 5 B 之藍色光之色座檷BC連结成之三角形所包圍之色範圍之 面積大致變成最大值,而色座搮WC所示之上述紅色光, 綠色光,和藍色光之混合光之色度(CO大致變成最小值。 亦即,對於各色在區素區域A之面槙之比率,在紅, 綠.藍之彩色過漶器15R,15G,15B中,當MS(R)表示長波 長區域之光透過之紅色過濾器15R之面積率,MS(G)表 示中間波長區域之光透過之綠色過濾器15G之面積率,和 MS(B)表示短波長區域之光透過之藍色過漶器15B之面 積率時, 在本實腌例中,經由將膜厚設定成t(G)&lt;t(R)&lt;t(B)之 鼷係,和將面積率設定成S ( R ) &gt; S ( B ) &gt; S ( G )之關係,可以 使上述color syste·之紅,綠,藍之各色光之色座標RC, GC , BC之各點連结成三角形所包圍之色範圍之面積變大, 和使上述表色系之上述紅色光,綠色光,藍色光之混合 光(白色光)之色度(CSO變小。 上述表色糸之面上之上述色範圍之面稹最好為 750以上,另外,上述混合光之色度(&lt;^)(離開3”0,1^ = 0之C光線之距離)最好為1.5 Μ下之值。 當對上述之紅,綠,藍之彩色過濾器15R,15G,15B之膜 厚和面積率進行具體之說明時,在本寊施洌中,各色之 膜厚為 -2 5 - 本紙張尺度通用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐} ---------裝------訂 _(請先M.讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) r 4407 4 1 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消资合作社印繁 五、發明説明(枓) 紅色過濾器膜厚t(R)=0.9〜1.2# « 綠色過濾器膜厚t(G)=0.8〜Ι.ΐΛί Μ色過濾器膜厚t(B&gt; = l.l〜1.4# 各色面積率(以圖素區域A作為10GX)是 紅色過濾器面積率S(R)=90〜95X 緣色過濾器面積率S(G&gt; = 60〜65X 藍色遇濾器面積率S(B) = 75〜80X 第10A圖〜第1GC圃分別表示在CIE 1976 C*a*b* color systeB上之色範圍,混合光之色度(C*),和亮度 (L*&gt;之隨著上述液晶顯示元件之各色之彩色過嫌器15R, 15G.15B之膜厚t(R),t(G),t(B)之變化。其中,所示之 待性是各色之面積率S(R),S(G),S(B)均為圖素匾域A之 面積之80!£。 第1G A圖表示上述之色範圍對各掴彩色過濾器膜厚之 變化待性,在該圓中, 實線所示之待性是缘和藍2色之彩色過濾器15G,15B 之膜厚t(G),t(B)分別固定為1.5#b,只使紅色過濾器 15 R之膜厚t(R)進行變化時之待性, 鍊線所示之特性是红和M2色之彩色過濂器15R,15B 之膜厚t(R),t(B)分別固定為只使緣色過濂器 1 5 G之膜厚t ( G )進行變化時之待性, 虛線所示之特性是紅和綠2色之彩色過濾器15R,15G 之膜厚t(R&gt;,t(G)分別固定為1.5// B,只使藍色過濾器 】5B之膜厚t (B)進行變化時之待性。 -2 6 - ^^1 i- - -1 ^^^1 ^^^1 l*^i ^^^1 1^1 - —.^1 、τ (請先έ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4現格(210X297公釐) 44 07 4 1 B7 五、發明説明(&gt;r) 依照第10A圖,當紅色過濾器(實線)和綠色過濾器(鍵 線)之膜厚變薄時,上述之色範圍就急激的變狹,對於 器,最 濾外為 過另成 色 β 圍 藍小範 第性 恃 於值中 虛&amp; ί示爿 {fl對大h圖 很色 化述 變上 之使 圍有 範在 色存 述都 上器 ,濾 化過 變之 之色 厚摘ο 膜一厚 之何膜 ¾)任之 化 變 之 厚 膜 器 濾 過 對 線 實 t 厚 膜 之 藍 和 缘 是 性 待(Β 之,t 示 G 所 為 定 固 別 分 器 濾 過 色 彩 之 色 器 濾 過 色 紅 使 只 9 1 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 厚 膜 性 特 之 時 化 變 17V &quot; 440741 μ B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (3) The absorption of the 1 mm device will also deteriorate the color balance and cannot be fully whitened 1 1 1 Show Q 1 1 [Summary of the invention] Read 1 first 1 The invention of the present invention is to provide a color liquid crystal display with a color pass filter 1 1 1 The display element t has sufficient brightness and good color level m * I 1 quality can display high back Color circle image 〇Note II The above-mentioned first state of the liquid crystal display element of the present invention is achieved by M. The item is composed of 1 and 1 pieces, including = fill in this! Pack-1 pair of substrates 1 are configured to face each other Pair I i 1 I m m 1st pole »formed on one of the above-mentioned pair of substrates facing each other 1 I side S 1 1 at least 1 second electrode% The other order formed on the above-mentioned facing side—the first side becomes facing each other with a plurality of first radio stations * used to form a plurality of plaques defined by the area where the first electrode faces above Area 1 Coloring 1 »9 Any of the 9 provided on the inner surface of the above pair of substrates 9 Pair 1 I should go to the above pixel area» The surface m has an area 1 smaller than the above-mentioned circle area 1 1 and r LCD calendar 9 It is sandwiched between the above-mentioned pair of substrates. 〇1 | When the liquid crystal display element according to the present invention is # 1 on any of the square substrates, the inner surface of the substrate 1 is 9 so that the surface of the color thinner corresponding to the element area is smaller than the above. The area of the 1 I complex region * depends on the formation of the emission E field of non-colored light. T uses 1 1 I non-colored light that has not passed through the color filter and 3 1 I color light that passes through the color filter to display 1 m. Pixels • Because of the Non-colored light is bright 1 I white light »It can make the brightness of each pixel higher» Take note of the indication 1 1 5-l 1 1 1 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 OX 297 (Mm) The Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed r 44 074 1 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (4) Bright colored artifacts. In addition, according to such a liquid crystal display element, since a reflection groove member is provided for reflecting the light from the front of the element and transmitting the liquid crystal light toward the surface, it is possible to obtain a bright reflective color liquid crystal head display element. . In addition, in the liquid crystal display element, the multi-color «filter S is placed in a central portion of the pixel region other than the peripheral portion, so that the composition of the sink region includes non-coloring formed on the peripheral portion. The light exits the plaque domain and the colored light exit area formed in the central part of the liquid crystal display element according to this structure, because the border with the adjacent pixel area is a non-colored light transmission area, so it meets 1 circle. The light in the prime region is reflected by a reflecting device located on the rear substrate side, and incident on the adjacent pixel plaque domain of another color, which can be used to reduce light absorption. In addition, in the liquid crystal display element, the multi-colored color pass device is made smaller than the elementary region described above, and the shape of a stripe is formed when viewed from the front of the element so that the horizontal width in the horizontal direction is smaller than that in the horizontal direction. The width of the crossing direction, and / or the non-colored light emitting areas are arranged in an orthographic arrangement, so that the light that has passed through the prime element region is reflected after passing through the liquid crystal layer and incident on another adjacent color In the pixel area, light absorption can be reduced. In addition, in this liquid crystal display element, the pixel region described above is provided with a colored light emitting region on a surface parallel to the substrate surface of the watch, and is divided and disposed along the horizontal direction when viewed from the front of the element companion. Multiple colored films, the area between the divisions is formed into a non-colored light exit area extending in the longitudinal direction. The paper size is applicable to Chinese national standards (CNS &gt; Α4 specification (210X297 mm) ----------- ------ Order ------ Λ (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) 44074 1 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () field So you can further improve the color image Brightness C% outside f In the liquid crystal display element, the above-mentioned pixel plaque region is provided with a ochre light emission plaque region on a plane parallel to the substrate surface. 9 When viewed from the front of the element, it is longitudinally shifted in the horizontal direction of 箸. Divide and match (multi-tilt coloring) 9 to form a non-colored light exit area 9 that extends horizontally on the substrate surface of the surface m, so it can be divided into 髙The light reflected from the top m to the surface of the substrate of table m. 0 Another 9 In this liquid crystal display element »It is arranged on the above _ plain plaque. The color film is horizontal when viewed from the front. 9 The configured positions are shifted in a direction orthogonal to the above-mentioned horizontal direction. * In this way, the light incident from the up-down direction to the surface of the thin substrate and the light incident from the left-right direction can be reflected efficiently with high brightness. »In this liquid crystal display element, 9 is provided with a reflecting member on the inner surface of the above-mentioned substrate. The inter-pixel region corresponding to each pixel region is used to reflect the incident light from the front of the element to the front again. By increasing the intensity of the reflected light from the portion between each pixel U domain 9 the brightness of the whole can be further improved. 2 The liquid crystal display element of the first aspect is the above-mentioned liquid crystal display element of the first aspect. The constitution of the above-mentioned ochre film includes: a coloring film for transmitting light of the middle wavelength plaque region in the visible light region. The film thickness of the ochre film $ that allows light in the long wavelength region to pass through and the coloring film that allows light in the short wavelength region to pass through is thickened in accordance with 7-the order above) and the color book Paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) 44 074 A7 B7 Printed by the staff of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Printed description of the invention (^) 1 The color surrounded by the color coordinates of the color film The range ((: 0) or ί! A bu 1) becomes the most I 1 large. 0 1 1 In this liquid crystal display element, the color structure is arranged in the element area from 3 color structures 5 '1 to 1 color. The film thickness of the device is set to 9 long waves in the visible light plaque field. Read 1 The thickness of the long plaque field through the ochre film is greater than the thickness of the middle wavelength region through the back of the ocher film. The thickness of the colored film is greater than the long wavelength. Note that the thickness of the black film transmitted through the I film in the I region is greater than 1 m. The color light of the black film that meets the m film can be specified. υ t), the color balance will not be inferior. This can make the screen very bright. Therefore, it can display a wide range of color pages — 1 I range for color display. 0 1 1 and 9 in the LCD display element 9逑 之 箸 color film is red »edge f 1 blue 3 color (Primary C ο 1 0 Γ) color filter, the color filter of each of the above 1 color film has Let the area of the above-mentioned color 1 range (c 0 1 0 ga 1 Ut) of the color filter be on the a * b * plane of CIEu 1 9 7 6 L this a * b this C 0 1 〇r I sy ste Be more than 7 5 0, used to expand the displayable color \ range L (C 0 1 〇Γ ga 9 U t) 9 color balance will not be degraded »can make all sides not 1 1 always bright 0 1 I and t In the liquid crystal display element, the film thickness of the color filter 1 f of each of the overseas Chinese is the m combined light of the color light 1 1 passing through the color filters of each color {c ο 1 or 透过 i X in g) The chromaticity (c hr 0 9 a) becomes a value of 1.5 or less on the a * b * surface of CI Ε 1 976 1 ta b * C ο 1 or S yste I, m 1 1 to achieve good color balance Color display 〇1 1 Another 9 In this liquid crystal display element> The above-mentioned color filters 1 I are made of red 8-9 line color 1 and M color using pigment dispersion material 1 1 1 1 1 This paper uses China National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210X297 mm) 44 074 1 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (7) 1 1 Filter The formed S is filtered by setting the film thickness of the red filter to 0.9 1 1 1 · 1 β \ 1 and the green filter to 0. 8--1 • 1 Μ a, and blue 1 1 The film thickness of the device is 1. bu 1. i μ a, which can meet the above color range, please first 1 and the chromaticity of the mixed light. Read 1%, in this liquid crystal display element, the color of each color Back 1 | 1 The filters have different area ratios and their respective m. Note on the pixel area 1 I area ratio is based on the color film used to transmit light in the middle wavelength region 1 Item 1 1 reuse To allow light in the short wavelength range to pass through The color film * and the order of the color film used to fill in the long wavelength j. 1 ά II area The order of the color film y becomes larger to make the color page-s_k · range and color balance better 0 1 1 In addition t In this liquid crystal display element> By making the above-mentioned color 1 1 filters of each of the colors have a red color of 0 · 9 ~ 1.2 μm, the edge color is 0.8 1. 1 ^ «1 order 9 and blue The film thickness is 1.1 Λ-1. 4 MB, and the s-domain of saccharin 1 has a red color of 90 9 5%, a ochre color of 6 0 ~ 6 5 * », and a blue color of 7 5 80 2 1 | Surface area ratio * can make the color range and color balance better. 1 The liquid crystal display element of the third aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned liquid crystal display element of the first aspect I 1 The layer is set as follows: the spring I has a first liquid crystal layer thickness 1 1 dl in a region corresponding to the above-mentioned ochre film. 1 1 In areas other than the area corresponding to the above-mentioned colored film, there is 1 | there is a second liquid crystal layer thickness d2 1 1 These liquid crystal layer thicknesses d 1, d 2 and the above-mentioned liquid crystal layer ff emissivity anisotropy The value of the product of △ η 1 1 △ η d 1 and △ nd2 are set so that the light transmission through the liquid crystal cell β having the value 1 I of the above product Δ nd 1: the light and the value of the product having the above product Δη -9-d 2 Of-1 1 1 1 1 1 This paper size applies to China National Standards (CNS &gt; A4 specifications (2) 0X 297 mm) 44074 t A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs «V. Description of the invention ( ί) 1 The spectral transmittance distribution of the individual light transmittance distributions of the light of the liquid crystal element is synthesized. 1 The transmittance distribution * becomes a flat value in the real wavelength region of visible light. 0 1 1 In order to pass through a liquid crystal with Δ ndl, please first The value of the product △ nd2 of the light reading of the liquid crystal element 1 1 The light splitting after the synthesis of the light distribution η The cure rate distribution on the back 1 1 The visible light wave region is substantially flat value »Available Pingyi 1 I Tan's light with wavelength distribution. ○ Matter 1 1 In addition, in the liquid crystal display element »Make the pair in the above-mentioned pixel area fill in the area where the color pass device should be installed. Uncorresponding page S_ «· 1 I to the above-mentioned color filter device area becomes a deviceless area» When the thickness of the liquid crystal between a pair of substrates sandwiched by tantalum 1 1 is d, the multi-refractive index is △ η, 1 1 When its product is △ nd • There is a difference between the above-mentioned filter area and the above-mentioned non-meeting filter plaque area in a plaque element area with different-I order Δ nc 9 1 Appropriate m chooses the thickness of the liquid crystal layer to compensate for the difference in light transmission and transmission ratios. It can make the daylight surface bright and display 1 Tfx color images with good color balance. 0 1 1 In addition «in In this liquid crystal display element, the value of Δ nd of the liquid crystal is changed to Λ 1 * When M dO indicates the thickness of the liquid crystal layer having the maximum transmittance, it passes through II to 1 Δ Δ ndl &lt; A ndO &lt; And2 1 I The image is appropriately selected. The thickness of the liquid crystal layer is selected so that the transmitted light is divided. 1 1 The difference in transmittance is compensated for each other. * The picture can be bright. 9 and 1 1 can be displayed with good color balance. Color image 〇1 I The fourth aspect of the present invention is the liquid crystal display element in the first 1 m 1 1 10 1 1 1 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (2) 0X29 * 7 mm ) 44 074 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (1) 1 of the same type of liquid crystal display elements are further equipped with 1 1 and 2 orientation films on one of the above substrates Inside surface i 1 &gt; and please 1 first I --- opposite to the hibiscus light plate * is arranged above the above--outside of the substrate m-shaped reading 1 into sandwiching these substrates Ϊ back surface 1 | No. 1 is the first orientation film of the m-base plate located in front of the light beam. »The horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display element when turning the liquid crystal display element on to note 1 I from the front is turning to 0. 5 · Matters i 1 Within the range of \ »Oriented J is applied on the front m substrate surface% of the second orientation film of the substrate on the back side of this package &gt; According to the first orientation page s_- 1 The orientation direction of the I film forms 90 &quot; cross direction &gt; where the orientation is applied! 1 理 〇1 | In the liquid crystal display element 9 the orientation direction of the liquid crystal molecules of the substrate 1 near the back side of the liquid crystal cell is changed from When viewed from the front direction, the horizontal axis of 1 on the display surface is formed in a direction of an angle of rotation greater than 0 ° and less than 45 °. The orientation of the liquid I crystal molecules is twisted by Russia. The twist angle is based on the orientation of the substrate near the back surface. As a reference, when viewed from the back substrate toward the front surface of the white substrate I 1, it turns to the right approximately 9 0 〇9. In this way, even the reflective type The TN liquid crystal display element of Λ 1 shows the display when viewed from the normal viewing direction. 1 1 can ensure sufficient contrast (C on tr as t) and sufficient brightness. 0 1 1 In addition, the liquid crystal display element The liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the back surface 1 I side substrate of the layer have the orientation direction set to 5 in the horizontal direction when viewed from the 1 1 side substrate of the *. -3 0 ΰ angle range 1 1 within the direction 9 so it can be brighter 0 In addition, in this liquid crystal display 1 I element 1 liquid crystal molecules near the back substrate of the liquid crystal layer 1 I -1 1-1 1 1 1 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Γ Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4407 4 J A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (丨 C) because it is oriented The direction becomes a direction within the angle range of about 10 ° ~ 25 &quot; when turned to the horizontal direction when viewed from the front panel, so it can be brighter. [Brief Description of the Drawings] Figure 1 is a plan view showing this The liquid crystal display element according to the first embodiment of the invention. Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional circle along the line II-II of the first frame. Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional circle along the ffl-m line of the first plaque. It is a cross-section drawing showing the arrangement of pixels and color filters of the liquid crystal display element of the first embodiment. Fig. 5 shows the film thickness of the color sensor of the liquid crystal display element of the first embodiment. And the chroma (chroia). Fig. 6 shows the film thickness and color range of the color filter of the liquid crystal display element of the first embodiment. The seventh group shows the liquid crystal of the first embodiment. The thickness of the color filter of the display element and the chroma of the mixed light. Fig. 8 shows the relationship between the film thickness and lightness of the color filter of the liquid crystal display element of the first embodiment. Fig. 9 is the first The liquid crystal display element of Example 1 is a CIE 1976 L * a * b * c ο 1 syssys μ μ. Figures I to A to IOC are color characteristic diagrams, which are used to indicate the color range and chromaticity, respectively. , And brightness and the film thickness of the color filter of the crystal display element of the first embodiment are related to each other ^ Figures 11A to 11C are color chart, which are used to indicate the color range -1 2-\ Please first Read the notes on the reverse side and fill in this page) This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210XM7 mm) 44 07 4 1 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of Invention (il) , Chromaticity, and brightness of the liquid crystal display element of the first embodiment Off hinder the area ratio of the color filter. Figures 12A to 12C show the relationship between the color tolerance, the chromaticity, and the brightness, respectively, and the film thickness of the color filter of the liquid crystal display element of the first embodiment. Figs. 13A to 13C are color characteristic diagrams, which are respectively used to represent the color range, chromaticity, and brightness with respect to the area ratio of the color filter of the liquid crystal display element of the first embodiment. Fig. 14 shows the relationship between Δnd and transmittance of the liquid crystal display element of the first embodiment. Fig. 15: Enlarged display. Fig. 14 is an enlarged view of a part of Fig. 14. Fig. 16 shows the spectral transmittance distribution of light that has passed through the filter region and the filterless region of the liquid crystal display element of the first embodiment, respectively. Fig. 17 shows the light transmittance distribution of the liquid crystal display element of the first embodiment. Fig. 18 is a perspective view showing a schematic structure of the liquid crystal display element of the first embodiment in an exploded view. The 19th is a squint, and is used to disassemble and display the schematic structure of the liquid crystal display element of the first embodiment. Fig. 20 is a plan view showing the arrangement of pixels and color filters of the liquid crystal display element of the second embodiment. Fig. 21 is a plan view showing the arrangement of pixels and color filters in a modified example of the liquid crystal display device of the second embodiment. Fig. 22 is a plan view showing the liquid crystal display element of the second embodiment-1 3-^^ 1 nn ^^^ 1--ml ^^^ 1 n ^ i ^ J1 J3, \ = tl t Read the notes on the reverse side and fill in this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS &gt; A4 grid (2 丨 〇 X 297 mm) 44 07 d 1 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (^) Central Ministry of Economic Affairs The staffing cooperative of the staff of the Taiwan Provincial Government Bureau of Yuanyuan Yuanyuan Yuanyuan Guangshi of Γ, the source of the explicit display of the display, the H-shaped display of the head display and the crystal part. The surface is waiting for crystals. Tuanping β plate is set with liquid, liquid, liquid, and liquid. The Jffi is a glass surface. The thickest part of it is slnffl crystal glass. Examples and examples 0 Shi Yuan Ui4 electric f cells »豳 marind 豳The actual display of the U-diaphragm plate 2 of the actual display device-HBI ,. Thin substrate device 3 4 5 6 7 The first filter of the crystal filter E0 column T. The Jffi row of the first liquid On the opposite side of TF, the plaque U is displayed in the color book. A color table, table, table, table, and table are clearly displayed. The 1U device comes from the color come. B1 said that the first U file was used, and the device was used in accordance with -1¾ yuan, medium,,,, filter, and technique. The picture was displayed along the plaque and window of the person who showed the color B. ϊ ¥ circle table is a color display type, 2 faces, faces, faces, and faces. Attached to the plaque circle and crystal array) 1 in the cross section, the flat color section, and the 21 element liquid rectangular plate example is yes yes yes The reference example of Hehe is the source graph of the first figure 3η4η. The picture element of the figure 3 will be circled, showing that there is a bright change 23242526 and a figure 2728. The first figure of the fence 1 is transmitted through the table. No. No. Number one. The first and the second side are the ones that come with this part. The parts and accessories are transparent and installed. The flat plaque is made of Yuancheng (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). cns) A4 grid (2 丨 〇X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 41 :, 〇 T 4- Τ'- Α7 Β7 5. The picture element of the description of the invention (β) 3 They are arranged in a matrix, and are provided with active elements (hereinafter referred to as TFTs) 4e formed of a plurality of TFTs respectively connected to the pixel unit 3e. The above-mentioned structure of the TFT4 includes: formed on the substrate 2 The upper electrode 5 and the capacitor forming electrode 12; the insulating film 6 covering the gate electrode 5 and the capacitor forming electrode 12; and the gate electrode 5 formed on the gate insulating film 6 Facing i-type semiconductor film 7: and an n-type semiconductor film (not shown in the circle) doped with impurities are formed on the source of the i-type semiconductor film 7, the onion electrode 8 and the drain on the drain region极 电 棰 9. In addition, on the back pin substrate 2 of the upper row, each of the rows is arranged along one of the rows, and a reed wire 10 is provided to supply a gate signal to the TFT 4 of each row, and the gate of the TFT 4 of each row The electrodes 5 are respectively integrated with the gate lines 1 Q corresponding to the column. In addition, the above-mentioned insulating film (transparent film) of the TFT 4 is formed on the entire surface of the substrate 1. The upper insulating wire 10 is covered by the gate insulating film 6 except for the terminal portion. On the above-mentioned galvanic electrode insulation film 6, one side of each tilted pixel electrode row is provided, and the S line has a data line 11 for supplying data signals to each of the TFTs 4 of each row, and the drain electrodes 9 of the TFT 4 of each row are respectively The data lines 11 corresponding to the row are connected. In this embodiment, the data line 11 is arranged on the above-mentioned sacral insulating film 6, and the drain electrodes 9 of the TFTs 4 of each row are respectively corresponding to the data of the row. The lines 11 are integrated. In addition, the above-mentioned pixel electrode 3 is formed on the above-mentioned μ-pole insulating film-1 5-----I ^^^ 1 I ^^^ 1 ^^^ 1 1. ^ 1 I— J n ^^^ 1 ^ ιτ '(Please read the notes on the back first and then fill out this page) The dimensions of this paper are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210XM7mm) 44 074 t B7 Central Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Consumer Bureau of the Standards Bureau. 5. Description of the invention () 1 6 on 9 The round element 3 is embedded in the corresponding end of one side edge. 1 1 I Source of TFT4 8 0 I 1 Another 9 In the inner surface of the back substrate 2, M covers the above-mentioned TFT4 and the method of covering the peripheral part of the first asset m 11 and the plaque element m 3. A coating culm reading 1 film 13 is provided, and an orientation film 14 is formed thereon. Backside I 1 On the other hand »Attention is provided on the inner surface of the front side substrate 1 as a display surface! Matt 1 multicolor (for example, Red, recorded, and 3 colors of M) color filters 15R, 15G, 1 and 15B, respectively, corresponding to the elementary electrode 3 corresponding to the above two substrates 2, please fill out this package »In the above color A black mask 16 f is formed in the area between the filters. A protective insulating film 17 that makes the page 1 I transparent is formed to cover the black mask 16. A transparent facing electrode 18 is formed on the protective 1 1 insulating film 17. For all the above-mentioned pixel I 1 electrode 3, use the facing electrode 18 and the above-mentioned pixel electrode 3 1 to order Parts of the face portion relative to the picture element region formed by Α. 1 In addition, the material of the color filter 15R, 15G, 15B can be selected by the manufacturer. The quality of the protective film (insulating film) can be omitted. 1 I The above-mentioned color filters 1 5R, 15G, and 15B are in the column direction and the row direction, and are divided into 1 1 and M, etc. RS ΓΤΠ t According to the red filter 15R, the green filter 156 &gt; the blue X 1 color filter 15B The color filters 15R 1 1 1 5G and 15 B correspond to different pixel regions A, respectively. 1 f 1515G, 15B of each color is the size of 1I, the area is smaller than the area of each element electrode 3 and the surface of the element area facing the electrode 1δ 1 * In this embodiment, the colors of each color are passed through the m 1 1 device 1 5R, 1 5G. 15B is set to correspond to the area of the inner foot except the chip edge portion of each pixel area. 0-1 -1 6-1 1 1 1 This paper is scaled with Chinese National Standard (CMS) A4 (210X297 mm). Printed by the Central Laboratories of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. 44074 1 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (β) In addition, the above-mentioned substrate on the front side 1 and back «substrate 2 are joined by a frame-shaped sealing material not shown in the picture, and a liquid crystal LC is filled in the area enclosed by the sealing material between the two substrates 1 and 2. In addition, the fixed film (horizontal alignment film formed of polyimide, etc.) 19, 14 provided on the inner surfaces of the above-mentioned pair of substrates 1, 2 is used to rub the film surfaces to marinate the orientation in a specified direction. . The liquid crystal LC filled between the two substrates 1 and 2 is restricted to the orientation direction of the liquid crystal molecules near the substrates 1 and 2 through the orientation_19 of the substrate 1 and the orientation film 14 of the back substrate 2. Between the two substrates 1,2, a twist angle specified by M (for example, about 90 °) is twist-oriented. In addition, polarizing plates 21.22 are prepared on the outer surfaces of one of the above-mentioned pair of substrates 1, 2, respectively, and the plutonium polarizing plates 21, 22 are arranged so that their optical sleeves (transmissive or absorbing sleeves) are oriented in a specified direction. . In addition, a reflective member 23 is disposed behind the polarizing plate 22 on the rear side to reflect light incident from the front side to the liquid crystal display element and transmitted through the liquid crystal layer. The reflection member 23 is composed of a white scattered reflection plate. The liquid crystal display element is a reflection type that uses external light to display. The light that enters each pixel area A through the front-side polarizing plate 21 from the front side ( (Direct-polarized polarized aurora), except for the peripheral portion of the pixel area A, the light passing through the inner area enters the color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B corresponding to the pixel plaque area A, and uses the color filter The device absorbs light in its absorption wavelength region and is used to color the color of the above-mentioned color wave filter. The colored light sequentially passes through the liquid crystal layer and the back polarizing plate 22 and is reflected by the reflection member 23 -17- (谙 先 Μ · Read the notes on the reverse side and fill in this page again) This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS &gt; Α4 size (210X 297mm)) J ------- Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ 4 4 07 4 1 a7 B7 V. Description of the invention (4), the above-mentioned rear polarizing plate 22, liquid crystal layer, color filter, and front polarizing plate 21 are sequentially emitted to the front side. In addition, When the person enters the light in each pixel area A, the person shoots at the plaque The peripheral part of the area A, that is, shot to the outside of the above-mentioned color filters 15R, 15G, 15B (the light of the area will not pass through the color filter, the sequential transparent liquid crystal layer and the back side hibiscus light plate After 22, it is reflected by the reflective member 23, and passes through the back polarizing plate 22, the liquid crystal layer, and the hibiscus light plate 21, and then exits to the front side. When using this type of liquid crystal display element, the color filter 1 The areas of 5 R, 1 5 G, and 15B are smaller than the area of pixel area A. Therefore, only the light that passes through the circle area A and hits the color filters 15R, 15B, and 15B is colored by the color filter. The light that absorbs its absorption wavelength region is colored, the other light is not absorbed by the color filter, and is transmitted directly with high-brightness non-colored light. The non-colored light and the above-mentioned colored light are used to display color pixels. In the case where white display is preferred over black display, by omitting the mask 16 arranged in the pixel area A, the incident light can be often disturbed by the reflective plate 23 and the gate line 10 described above. And data line 11 and so on. The bright display area W is used to obtain a bright display. The fourth plaque is a plan view showing the arrangement of pixels and color filters of the liquid crystal display element of the first cell example. The pixel area A is as shown in FIG. 4 It is shown that the structure of the peripheral portion includes: a non-colored light emitting area b (the area where the color of the reflecting member 23 is white is used for high-brightness uncolored light ^ ils I. ^^^ 1 n * ^ i ^ lr -° _ (Please read the notes on the back of the page before filling in this page) This paper size applies the Chinese national standard (CNS &gt; A4 grid (2 丨 0X297 mm) 44 07 4 1 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention ( ) (Please read the note on the back side before filling out this page) Transmission; and colored light exit area a, which is used to transmit the light colored to the color of the central part »the color of the wave device, the circle area A is used to combine the light passing through the colored light emitting area a and the non-colored light emitting area b, respectively, as a range of one color display circle. Therefore, according to the above-mentioned liquid crystal display element, the displayed display pixels are colored to the colors of the color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B, and the brightness is high. Therefore, according to this liquid crystal display element, even if it is a reflection type, the M reflection element 23 can reflect a light incident from outside the front to perform display, and can display a very bright color image. In addition, in a reflective liquid crystal display element, when light incident to the vicinity of the edge portion of the pixel area A is reflected by the reflection groove, and transmitted through the vicinity of the edge portion of the pixel area, the emission is performed by K. In the conventional liquid crystal display element, because the color filter corresponds to the entire pixel area, the light that is incident on the edge of the pixel area is colored to the color of the color pixel of the pixel area. The light reflected by the reflecting member and incident near the edge of the plaque element area is absorbed by the color filter and will not be emitted to the front surface of the display element, so the display pixels become dark. The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standards, Employees' Cooperatives, Printing Co., Ltd. is not as good as this. 9T &gt; Non-Prime Ministers, because of suspicion, due to the passing of accumulated light, and the closeness of the neighbors when they are close to each other. M Attached W Enter the element in the section of Yuan Keyuan, and show the marginal shot to show «so that the sucking ring crystal will immediately receive the liquid, and the W person who is to the light neighbor society should be shot in the same way as δ, because of this Because of the real domain B, it is described in 15 areas. G on the timer, 15 shots of prime shots, and attached to R, and the quilt color is -15! The state edge color is what the shape of the edge is, but it is filtered. It is in the color gamut. This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) &quot; 4407 4 1 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (β) The brightness of the light emitted from the front surface of the display element will not decrease β In addition, in the above embodiment, The prime plaque field is formed like a quadrangle, but it is not limited to this way. It can also make the above-mentioned round prime area into a substantially ellipse or figure. By making the color filters 15R, 15G, 15B out of shape Less than the quadrangle, it can be used to shorten the length of the step generated along the periphery of the step to prevent the reduction of contrast caused by light leakage caused by the disorder of the alignment state of the liquid crystal molecules in the step portion. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, The color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B are formed on the substrate 1 provided with the facing electrode 17, but may be formed on the substrate 2 provided with the pixel electrode 3. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the above-mentioned color filter To use pigment dispersion The color filter is formed. When t (R &gt; is used to indicate the film thickness of the red filter 15 R that can transmit the light in the long wavelength region of the red, green, and M color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B, t (G) indicates the film thickness of the edge color filter 15B through which light of the middle wavelength plaque field can pass, and t (B) indicates the film thickness of the blue filter 15B through which light in the short wavelength region can be transmitted.刖 Set to t (G) &lt; t (R) &lt; t (B). Printed by the Consumer Standards Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). The chromaticity C * (chroma) of the chromatic light produced by these color filters will follow these color filters. The film thickness of the filter is changed, and the conversion method is as shown in Fig. 5. Fig. 5 shows that when the film thickness t (R &gt;, t (6), t (B) of the color filter is changed), the transmission Changes in the chromaticity C * of the color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B of each of the red, margin, and blue color filters on CIE 1976 L * a * b * color systeB. The above-mentioned chromaticity C * represents the change from CIE 1976 -2 0-This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (2 丨 0 X 297 mm) 44 07 4 1 A7 Central Consumers Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives, Printing and Printing B7 5. Description of the invention () color syste »The distance from the C light source (a * = 0, b * = 0 achromatic points) on the a * b * surface to the color base sample points of each of the cyan light of red, edge, and blue. The chromaticity C * of each colored light has a maximum value for the change in the film thickness of the color filter, which is used to indicate the maximum value of the color filter film of each color Thick with t (G) &lt; t (R) &lt; t (B), which is used to indicate the maximum thickness of the color filter of each color is the thickness of the red filter t (R) = 0.9 ~ 1.2; u edge color filter film thickness t (G &gt; = 0 · 8 ~ 1. 1 # * Blue filter film thickness t (B) = ll ~ 1.4 # 1 in the range β Therefore, the color filters 1 5 Ιϊ, 1 5 S , 15 5 Β film thickness t (R), t &lt; G), t (B) are respectively set to film thicknesses used to indicate that the chromaticity (C *) of the ochre light passing through the color filter is the maximum, which can make the CIE 1976 L * a * b * color system The area surrounded by the color coordinate points of the 3 掴 colored light on the a * b * surface (also the range of the color> becomes larger, and more colors can be displayed. Figures 6 囫 to 8 show the use of from the above figure The colored light of the light emitted from the filter of the prime area A corresponding to the area a and the non-colored light of the emitted light from the non-colored light exit area b. CIE 1976 L * a * b * color system characteristics change (varies with the film thickness of each color filter). Among them, the shown performance is the color filter 15R, -2 1- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies Chinese National Standard {CNS) A4 size (2 丨 0 X 297 mm) 44074 ί Α7 Β7 by the Ministry of Standards and Technology Bureau of the Ministry of Standards and Consumers Cooperative Yin Fan 5. Description of the invention () The areas of 15G and 15B are characteristics when the area of the prime region A is 80¾. Figure 6 shows the color range, Figure 7 shows the chromaticity (chrona) of each color, and Circle 8 shows the change characteristics of brightness. In the characteristics shown in Figure 6, the solid lines are the green and blue color filters 15G, 15B, and the film thickness t (G) and t (B) are fixed at 1.5 wa respectively, so that only the red filter When the film thickness t (R) of the device 1 5 R is changed, the film thickness t (R) and t (G) of the color filter 15R.15B with the key wires being red and 齄 are fixed at 1.5 wa respectively. When the film thickness t (G) of the green filter 15B is changed, the dotted lines are the color filters 15R of red and green 2 and the film thickness t (R) and t (G) of 15G are fixed to 1.5W a, When only the film thickness t (B) of the blue filter 15B is changed. As shown in the filter film thickness of this FIG. 6-the characteristics of the color fan garden, the film thickness of each color filter is equal to the film thickness t (R) of the red filter = 0.9 ~, and the film thickness t of the green filter is t ( G) = 0.8 ~ 1.1 Wb, the thickness of the M color extinguisher is in the range of t (B) = 11 ~ 1.4ua, and the above-mentioned color fan painting has the maximum value. The characteristic shown by the solid line in the seventh circle is the color filter 15G.15B. The film thickness t (G), t &lt; B) When the thickness t (R) of the red filter 15R is changed, the characteristics are fixed at 1.5wm respectively. The characteristics shown by the white lines are the colors of the red and blue color filters 15R, 15B. The film thickness t (R) and t (B) are fixed to the characteristics when only the film thickness t (G &gt;) of the green extinguisher 15G is changed. The characteristics shown by the dashed lines are red and green color filters. 15R, UG -22-! — SI — ί-1 ^ 1 I--,---I ——! J ^ i {Please read _ read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210 × 297 mm) by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Industry and Engineering of Fangong Consumer Cooperatives, Fanfan r 4407 4 1 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (&gt; 〇2_-t (R), t ( G &gt; Fixed at 1.5u respectively. »The characteristics when only the film thickness t (B) of the blue filter 15B is changed. As shown in the filter film thickness-chrominance characteristics of this FIG. The thickness is respectively red film thickness t (R) = 0.9 ~ 1.2μ b, green film thickness t (G) = 0.8 ~ 1.1 / i blue filter film thickness UB) = 1.1 ~ 1,4 / In the range of iB, the chromaticity C * 躭 of the upper mixed light becomes a smaller value 0. In addition, when the above mixed When the chromaticity of light is a small value, the color of the mixed light is close to the C light source on the face of CIE 1976 color * systea, and the color of the mixed light becomes a good white light without color. The characteristics shown in 烺 are the film thickness t (G) of 15G and 15B color filters, and UB &gt; are fixed at 1.5ub respectively, so that only the film thickness t (R) of the red killer 15R is changed. The characteristic shown by 鐽 堞 is that the thickness of the red and blue color detectors 15ϋ, 15B, and the thickness t (R), t (B) are fixed at 1.5β a, only the green filter 15G is used. The characteristic when the film thickness t (G) is changed. The characteristic shown by the dotted line is the color pass filter 15R for red and green, and the film thickness UR} for 15G, t (G) is fixed to 1.5wb, only blue The film thickness of the color filter 15B is changed. As shown in the filter film thickness-brightness characteristics of Figure 8, the red, green, and blue color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B have a film thickness UR), t (G), and t (B &gt; are the above ranges (Ί (ϋ) = 0.9 ~ 1.2 / ί 111,1: (0) = 0.8 ~ l.lw π ,, t (B) = ll ~ 1.4wm) The brightness (L *) of the mixed light is about 51 ~ ( Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) This paper uses Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (2) 0 X 297 mm. Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Standards and Printing Co., Ltd. 44 074 1 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (^) 5 In the fan garden of 3, if there is such a degree of brightness (L 时, 躭 has sufficient display brightness. In addition, the brightness of the above-mentioned mixed light (L *) will follow «The thickness of the film becomes thinner and thinner, but when the film thickness of the filter is reduced, the chromaticity of the colored light will be reduced, which will narrow the color range, so the red, green, and blue color filters 15R, The film thickness t (R &gt;, t (G), t (B) of 15G, 15B is preferably in the above range. In addition, in the above embodiment, a color filter was used as the coloring film, but the above-mentioned coloring film It is not limited to the use of color pass filters. In addition, the liquid crystal display element of the above embodiment uses the additive color mixing of red, green, and blue light to display a color image, but it can also be used to use the coloring with three colors of purple, yellow, and blue-green. (For example, color filter) Subtracting and mixing to display liquid crystal display elements that display color images. In this case, the film thickness of the 3-color colored film has a long wave region transmission through the coloring film. Film <The system of the short-wavelength plaque region transmitting through the colored film, and the film thickness of the above-mentioned three-color colored film is set to approximately the maximum chromaticity of the colored light that passes through each colored film, and is used to make the above-mentioned coloring available The film has a wide color range and no degradation of color balance, so that the screen has sufficient brightness. In addition, in order to improve the color balance, the area of the color filter M is set in the following manner. The coordinates of each of the red light, green light, and blue light of the liquid crystal display element of this embodiment on the face of CIE 1976 color systeia. _ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper The standard is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm). It is printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Industry. T 4 4 074 1 a? B7 5. Description of the invention (W) The color filter of the liquid crystal display element The film thickness and area are set so that the color coordinate RC of the red light passing through the red filter 15R, the green color coordinate 祢 GC passing through the green filter 15 G, and the blue light passing through the blue filter 15 B The area of the color range surrounded by the triangle formed by the color seat 檷 BC becomes approximately the maximum, and the chromaticity of the above-mentioned mixed light of red light, green light, and blue light (CO substantially becomes The minimum value. That is, for the ratio of each color to the surface area of the vowel region A, in the red, green, and blue color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B, when MS (R) represents a red filter through which light in a long wavelength region passes When the area ratio of 15R, MS (G) indicates the area ratio of the green filter 15G through which the light in the middle wavelength region is transmitted, and MS (B) indicates the area ratio of the blue filter 15B through which the light in the short wavelength region is transmitted. In this example, the film thickness is set to t (G) &lt; t (R) The relationship between &lt; t (B) and setting the area ratio to S (R) &gt; S (B) &gt; S (G) can make the above-mentioned color syste · red, green, and blue each light The color coordinates of RC, GC, and BC are connected to form an area surrounded by a triangle, and the area of the color range of the red light, green light, and blue light (white light) of the above-mentioned color system is increased. (The CSO becomes smaller. The surface of the color range described above is preferably 750 or more. In addition, the chromaticity of the mixed light ( &lt; ^) (the distance from the C-rays from 3 "0,1 ^ = 0) is preferably the value at 1.5 M. When the red, green, and blue color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B film thickness are mentioned above When specific description is made with the area ratio, in this application, the film thickness of each color is -2 5-This paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -------- -Install ------ Order_ (please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) r 4407 4 1 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of invention (枓) Red Filter film thickness t (R) = 0.9 ~ 1.2 # «Green filter film thickness t (G) = 0.8 ~ Ι.ΐΛί Μ color filter film thickness t (B &gt; = ll ~ 1.4 # The prime area A is 10GX) is the area ratio of the red filter S (R) = 90 ~ 95X. The area ratio of the edge filter S (G &gt; = 60 ~ 65X. The area ratio of the blue filter area S (B) = 75 ~ 80X. 10A Figure ~ 1GC shows the range of colors on CIE 1976 C * a * b * color systeB, the chromaticity (C *) of mixed light, and the brightness (L * &gt;) along with the colors of the above-mentioned liquid crystal display elements. Change of film thickness t (R), t (G), t (B) of color sensor 15R, 15G. 15B Among them, the shown properties are the area ratios S (R), S (G), and S (B) of each color are 80! £ of the area of the pixel plaque domain A. Figure 1G A shows the above color range pair The thickness of each color filter is different. In this circle, the properties shown by the solid lines are the thicknesses of the edge and blue color filters 15G and 15B. The thickness t (G) and t (B) are respectively Fixed at 1.5 # b, only when the film thickness t (R) of the red filter 15 R is changed, the characteristic shown by the chain line is the film thickness t of the red and M2 color filter 15R, 15B (R), t (B) are respectively fixed to change the film thickness t (G) of the edge color filter 15 G, and the characteristics shown by the dotted lines are red and green color filters The film thickness t (R &gt;, t (G) of 15R, 15G is fixed to 1.5 // B, respectively, and only the blue filter] 5B film thickness t (B) is changed. -2 6-^ ^ 1 i---1 ^^^ 1 ^^^ 1 l * ^ i ^^^ 1 1 ^ 1-—. ^ 1, τ (Please read the precautions on the back first and then fill out this page) This paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) 44 07 4 1 B7 V. Description of the invention (&r; r) According to Figure 10A, when the red filter (solid line) and the green When the film thickness of the color filter (key wire) becomes thinner, the above-mentioned color range becomes sharply narrower. For the device, the outermost filter is another color. {fl The big h picture is very colorized, and the color of the color is described by the filter, and the color thickness of the filter is changed. The film is a thick film, and the film is thick. The filter filters the solid blue and the edge of the thick film. (B of the t, G is the fixed solid divider, the color of the filter, the color of the filter, and the color of the red filter is only 9 1 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page) Thick film characteristics change with time 17

藍 和 紅 是 性 隹 }特 R { 之 LL 示 所 線 之 -, kc R _ 5 IX 器 濾 過 色 彩 之 色 厚 膜 之 厚 膜 之 性 特 之 時 化 &gt; 變 ί行 (Β進 )/ 器 濾 過 色 緣 使 只 a Μ 5 1Χ 為 定 固 別 所 t 線厚 虛膜 之 器 濾 過 色 彩 之 色 2 綠 和 紅 是 厚 膜 之 性 1.特 為之 定時 固化 別變 ί 分行 fs)冑 特 &lt; } 之 t’(B vlr 示 η 器 濾 過 色 藍 使 只 9 照 圖 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 之 器好 濾良 過衡 色平 緣色 當成 形 度 色 時 薄 變 厚 膜 之 Λ—/ 線 鐽 小 變 態 狀 厚形 膜 , 當小,變 \/ )/ 線C* 虛 ί U度 器色 濾時 過厚 色變 藍厚 和膜 η當 線 實 ’。 {Ϊ大態 器變狀 濾*)之 過(C好 色度良 紅色衡 於時平 對薄色 變成 第性 特 度 亮 之 光 合 混 示 表 圖 化 變 之 厚 膜 器 濾 過 對 中 圖 該 在 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210 X 297公釐) 44 07 4 t A7 B7 五、發明説明(&gt;&amp; 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印裝 實線所示之特性是線和藍2色之彩色過濾器15G,15B 之膜厚t(G),t(B)分別固定為1.5# a,只使紅色過濾器 1 5 R之膜厚t ( G )進行變化時之特性, 辨線所示之特性是红和齄2色之彩色過濾器15R,15B 之膜厚t(R),t(B)分別固定為1.5a *,只使綠色過濾器 15G之膜厚t(G)進行變化時之待性, 虛線所示之待性是紅和緣2色之彩色過濾器15R,15G 之膜厚1;(1〇,1(6)分別固定為1.5#1«,只使藍色過濾器 15B之暌厚t(B)進行變化時之特性。 依照第10C圖,當彩色過嫌器之膜厚變薄時,亮度(L*) 之值就變高,尤其是在红色過濾器(實線)之情況其傾向 更加顯著β 因此,本實施例之液晶顯示元件根據第10Α圖各色之 過濂器之膜厚設定在上述色範圍表示最大之範圍。 另外,根據第10Β圖將綠色過濾器之膜厚t(G)設定為 最薄,將藍色過濾器之膜厚t(B&gt;設定為最厚,和將綠色 過濾器之膜厚設定為中間之值。 另外,根據第10C圖將上述之各锢過濂器之膜厚設定 成為在上述色範圍表示最大值之範圍中使各俚之膜厚變 薄。 第11A圖〜第11C圖分別表示,相對於上述液晶顯示元 件之各色之面積率S(R),S(6),S(B)之變化,上述color systen之色範圍,和混合光之色度(C*},及亮度(L*)之 變化,其中所示之待性是各色之彩色過濾器15R,15G, 請 先 閱· 背 之 /i 意 事 項 再 填 /I裝 頁Blue and red are sex 隹} special R {LL shows the line of-, kc R _ 5 IX filters the color of the color thick film thick film of the characteristics of the timeliness &gt; change line (Β 进) / device Filtering the color edge makes only a Μ 5 1 × is the color of the thick line virtual film filter color filter color 2 green and red is the nature of thick film 1. Specially fixed at regular intervals Do not change the branch fs) special &lt; } Of t '(B vlr shows η filter color blue so that only 9 photos of the device printed by the Central Consumers Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. good filter good balance color flat edge color when forming color thin thin film — / The line is small and deformed and is a thick film. When the line is small, it becomes \ /) / Line C * is too thick. When the color filter is too thick, the color becomes blue and the film is solid. (Ϊ 大 态 器 变 变 滤 *) After (C good chroma, good red balance, time balance, light color, lightness, lightness, mixed light, display, change, thick film filter, filter The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 44 07 4 t A7 B7 V. Description of the invention The film thickness t (G) and t (B) of the color filter 15G and 15B of the line and blue are fixed to 1.5 # a, respectively, when the film thickness t (G) of the red filter 15 R is changed. The characteristic shown by the line is the film thickness t (R) and t (B) of the color filters 15R and 15B of two colors of red and ochre respectively fixed to 1.5a *, and only the film thickness t of the green filter 15G (G) The waiting behavior when the change is made. The waiting behavior shown by the dotted line is the film thickness 1 of the color filters 15R and 15G with two colors of red and edge; (10, 1 (6) are fixed to 1.5 # 1 «, The characteristic when only changing the thickness t (B) of the blue filter 15B. According to Fig. 10C, when the film thickness of the color filter becomes thin, the value of the brightness (L *) becomes higher, especially Filtered in red (Solid line) The tendency is more significant β. Therefore, the liquid crystal display element of this embodiment is set to the maximum range indicated by the above-mentioned color range according to the film thickness of the filter of each color in FIG. 10A. In addition, the green color is shown in FIG. 10B. The film thickness t (G) of the filter is set to the thinnest, the film thickness t (B &gt; of the blue filter is set to the thickest, and the film thickness of the green filter is set to a middle value. In addition, according to Section 10C In the figure, the film thickness of each of the above-mentioned diaphragms is set to make the film thickness of each of the diaphragms thinner within the range in which the above-mentioned color range represents the maximum value. Figs. 11A to 11C show the thickness of each of the liquid crystal display elements with respect to the liquid crystal display element. Changes in the area ratios S (R), S (6), S (B) of each color, the color range of the above color systen, and the change in the chromaticity (C *) and brightness (L *) of the mixed light. Shown is the color filter 15R, 15G of each color, please read the first of the / i notes before filling / I

II Λ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ297公釐) 4 7 ο 4 4 Γ 明说 明發 '五 性 特 。化 性變 待之 之積 時面 S 器 濾 1.過 為對 均圍 Β 範 t(色 .之 (G述 ,t上 R)示 t 表 厚圖 膜1A «1 之第 B 0 Λί 器 濾 過 色 彩 之 色 2 藍 和 緣 是 性 特 ,之 中示 圖所 該線 在實 率率 積積 面面 之之 為 定 固 別 分 器 濾 過 色 紅 使 只 性 待 之 時 化 變 行 進 藍 和 紅 是 I G Μϋ ( 特s’ 之R) 示 S 所率 線積 _ 面 之 率 積 面 之 2 性 ο 8 特 為之 定時 固化 別變 分行 &gt;進 1 器 R 嫌 5 — 1 過 器色 濾綠 過使 色只 彩, 之0% iy 色 ,(請先si讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝· 性; 特&quot; \/ \»/ 之 cd Β /V /(V &quot;s S 所率率 線積積 虛面面 之之 -了 進 1 器 R,濂 5 11 1 過 器色 濾藍 過使 色只 彩 , 之0%。二 W =Μ a γ 是ί 1 性 第特 化 度 色 之 光 合 混 示 表 圖 變 之 率 積 面 器 濾 過 對 訂 中 圖 該 在 性 ί 特S 之G)R) /f\ /1. 示 s s 所率率 線積積 實面面 之之 行 進 1 器 C5 嫌 5 1 過 器色 濾红 過使 色只 彩 , 之0%, 色 β 性 為Μ 2定待 1 固 ^ ^ ^ 是Β變 Λ 經濟部中央標準局I工消费合作社印掣 性一 恃S 之 R G /iv f% 示 s s 所率率 線積積 鍊面面 之之 -7 ί— 進 性 ί 待,s進 \!/ \Iy 之 R B /|\ *w 一不 s S 所率率 U 線積積第 虛面面在 之之 1 器 R’濾 5 rl 1 過 器色 濾緣 過使 色只 彩 , 之0%, 色I性 為 2 待二 Μ inJlif時 紅&quot;化 是 Ϊ# ,器 5R濾. 1S 濾色 過藍 色使 彩,κ 之0%。 色y性 ^ ^ ^ £jla® 別 是 &gt; 變 U行 頚 中 圖 示 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2IOX 297公釐) 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印11 44 4 t Α7 Β7五、發明説明(β ) 當緣色過濾器(鍵線)之面積率接近6 0 5£時,混合光之 色度(C =〇變成最小, 藍色過濾器(虛線 &gt; 之混合光之色度(C*)變成最小之面 積率,高於缘色過濂器(鍵線)之混合光之色度(0*&gt;受成 最小之面積率, 紅色過逋器(實線)之混合光之色度(C*)變成最小之面 積率,高於藍色過濾器(虛線)之混合光之色度(C*)變成 最小之面積率。 第11C圖表示混合光之亮度(L*)對過濾器面積率之變 化特性,在該圖中, 實線所示之特性是緣和藍2色之彩色遇濾器156, 15B 之面積率S(G&gt;,S(B&gt;分別固定為80J:,只使紅色過濾器15R 之面積率S(ii)進行變化時之待性, 鍵線所示之恃性是紅和藍2色之彩色遇濂器15R,15B 之面積率S(R&gt;,S(B)分別固定為80X,只使綠色過濾器15G 之面積率S(G)進行變化時之待性, 虛線所示之待性是紅和錄2色之彩色過濾器15R,15G 之面積率S(R),S(G)分別固定為80!ϊ,只使藍色過濾器15B 之面積率S(B)進行變化時之待性。 在第UC画中顯示當各色之過濾器之面積率變小時,混 合光之亮度(L*)就變大。 因此,本宵施例之液晶顯示元件是根據第11團B將各色 之過濾器之面積率設定成分別依照綠色過濾器,藍色過 濾器,紅色過濾器顒序的變大,和根據第11A圖和第11C圖 -3 0 - \讀先軋讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) v. 44 07 4 1 at B7 經濟部中央榡準局負工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明(4 ) Ί 1 I 將 上 述 各摘過 濾器之面積 率設定 成為使 色範 醣 和混合 1 1 I 光 之 亮 度(L*) 之值都不會 變小。 1 I 另 外 ,上述 第 ΙΟΑΗ ~ 第1 和第11ABI . '•第11C圖所 /—^ 請 1 I 及亮度 先 1 示 之 色 範圍和 混合光之色 度(C*) 是 混合光之 閲| 1 值 該 混合光 包含有:來 自各鴒 國素區 域A 之 替色光射 背 之 1 i 出 區 域 之射出 光之紅,緣 ,藍之 箸色光 ;來 非箸色光 注 意 1 I ;和來 事 1 射 出 匿 域b之 射出光之非 箸色光 自β 素 匾域間之 項 再 1 m 素 間 區域之 射出光之非 箸色光 〇 填 寫 本 Λ 其 次 如上所 述,以第1^圏〜第12C_ 和第 13A圜〜第 頁 1 I 13c圖用來表示當將各襴之彩色過濾器1 5R , 1 56 ,15B之膜 1 1 厚 t (R) ,t(G), t ( B )和商稹 率 S (R) ,S(G), sum 定在各種 1 1 值 時 在C I E 1976 L*a*b * c 〇 1 〇 r sy st e b上 之 色範圍和 1 訂 1 1 混 合 光 之色度 (C*)及亮度 (L* )之 值。 第 12A團〜第12C薩所示 之特性 是將红 色過 濾 器15R之 » [ 1 面 積 率 S (R), 線色過濾器 15G之面積率S (G), 和 籃色過濾 a 1 I 器 15B之面稹率S(B)固定為S(R) = 90% , S ( β) =60X ,S(B)=75% 1 i 和 使 红色過 濾器15R之膜厚t U),缘色 過濾 器 15G之膜 «Ί 1 厚 t (G) ,和藍色過濾器15B之膜厚 t(B)之 膜厚 差 具有 1 I 錄 色 過濾器 膜厚t (G&gt; = t (R)-〇 1 0 ju α 1 1 藍 色 過濾器 睽厚t(B) (R) -0 . 2 0#· 1 t 之 鬭 僳 時之各 種變化特性 。圖中 之横_ 之代 表 值是紅色 1 I 過 濾 器 之膜厚 t (R)。 1 1 第 12 A圖表示色範圍之變化特性,第1 2B圈 是 表示混合 1 I 光 之 色 度(C*) 之變化持性 ,第12 C圖表示混合光之亮度 j 1 I -3 1 - 1 ί _ 1 • 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準ί CNS &gt; A4規格(2丨〇乂297公釐) 44074 f 經濟部中夬標準局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7五、發明説明(芥) (L * )之變化持性。 第12 A圖表示當红色過濾器之膜厚小於0.9//*時,要 進行全彩色顯示需要顯示很多色,色範匾之值小於750, 當膜厚在0.9# B以上和1.2# π以下之範圍時,色範圍超 過?5 0之值。 另外,第12 B圖表示當紅色過濾器之膜厚在0.9# B以 上和大約1.2# β以下之範騸時,混合光(白色光)之色度 (C*)之值實質上需要進行未著色之白顯示,所以色度 (C*)變成1 . 5 /i η以下之值β 另外,第12C隱表示當红色過濾器之膜厚在0.3# a以 上和1·2αβ以下之範圍時,混合光(白色光)之亮度(L*) 因為要進行很亮之顯示,所以亮度U*)變成52以上之值。 第13 Α画〜第13C圓所示之待性是將红色過濾器15R之 膜厚t(R),緣色過濾器15 G之膜厚UG),和藍色過濾器 15B 之膜厚 t(B&gt; 固定為 t(R) = 1.0;u n,1:(6)=0.9^ m,t(B) = 1·2#β,和使紅色過濾器15R之面積率S(R),緣色過濾 器15G之面積率S(G),和藍色過濂器15B之面積率S(B)以 緣色過濾器面積率S(G&gt; = S(R)-303; 藍色過濾器面積率S(B)=S(R)-15X 之關傜,使各色之面積率分別具有一定之比例之差,變 化面積率時之持性。圖中之横軸之代表值是紅色過濾器 之面積率S (R)。 第13A圖表示色範圍之變化待性,第13B圖表示混合光 之色度(CM之變化特性,第13C圖表示混合光之亮度(L*) -32- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) '裝. 訂 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標隼(&lt;:&gt;^)六4規格(210乂297公釐) 經濟部中央榇準局員工消費合作社印製 44〇74ί Α7 Β7五、發明説明(W ) 之變化待性。 第13Α圖表示當紅色過濾器之面積率小於90%時,要進 行全彩色顯示需要顯示很多色,各艏顯示色之上述色範 圍之值變成小於750,當紅色過濾器之面積率在30Χ以上 時上逑之色範圍之值就超過750。 另外,第13Β画表示當紅色過濾器之面積率在80ϋί以上 和1QQ56以下之範圍時,各色之混合光(白色光)之上述色 度(C*)實質上需要進行未箸色之白潁甲,所以色度(C*} 變成1 . 5以下之值β 另外,第13C圖表示當紅色過濾器之面積率在80 X以上 時,各色之混合光(白色光}之上述亮度(L*)因為要進行 很亮之顯示,所以亮度(L*)變成52以上之值《&gt; 另外,上述第12Α圖〜第12C圖和第13Α圖〜第13C圔所 示之色範圍和混合光之色度(C*)及亮度是混合光之 值,該混合光包含有:來自各個圏素區域A之過濾器對 應區域a之射出光之红,緣,藍之箸色光;來自非箸色 光射出區域b之射出光之非著色光;和來自相鄰圖素區 域間之亮顯示區域W之射出光之非著色光。 依照設定有上逑第12A圖〜第12C圈和第13A圖〜第13C _所示之各種值之液晶顯示元件之色範圍和混合光之 色度(C*)及亮度(L*)之值時,CIE 1976 L*a*b* color system之a*b*面之色範圍之面積變成大致為最大,紅色 光,緣色光和藍色光之混合光之色度(C*)變成大致為最 小,和上述混合光之亮度(L*)變成很亮,這時過濾器膜 -3 3- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準{ CNS &gt; A4規格(210X297公釐) 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印^ 44074 1 at B7五、發明説明(^ ) 厚和過«器面積率(對醑素區域A之面積之比率)最好成為 紅色過濾器膜厚t(R)=0.9〜1.2w b 綠色過薄器膜厚t(G)=0.8〜1.1以a 藍色過濾器膜厚t(B)=l.l〜1.4μ b 紅色過濾器面積率S(R)=90〜95S; 綠色過濾器面積率S(G)=60〜65X 藍色過濾器面積率S(B)=75〜80X 經由將紅,綠,藍之彩色過油器15R,15G,15B之膜厚UR) ,UG).UB)和面積率S(RKS(G),S(B)設定在上述範圍之 值,要進行全彩色顯示時霜要顯示很多色,所以使上述 色範圃之面積之值成為750M上,上述混合光之色度(C*) 實質上爾要進行未著色之白顬示,所从色度(CO變成1.5 以下之值,和上述混合光之亮度(L*)因為要進行很亮之 顯示,所以亮度(L*)變成大於52附近之值。 亦即,上述之液晶顯示元件在第9團所示之CIE 1976 color sysfcea上,紅色光之色座檷RC,綠色光 之色座標GC,和藍色光之色座檁BC連结成三角形所包圍 之色範圍之面積大致為最大(7 50M上),其混合光之色 度(C幻為極接近a = 0,b * = 0之C光源之值(C * = 1 · 5 Μ下)。 因此,依照上述之液晶顯示元件時,紅,綠,藍之各 色之色度(C*)和色平衡不會劣化,可Μ提高光之透過率 使畫面十分的明亮,所Μ可以顯示良好晝質之全彩色圖 像。 另外,在上逑之第1實施例中,上述之液晶層是利用 -3 4 - — _ I - - H— - - HI —I II ---- . I--- ^^1 ' {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標隼(CNS ) A4規《格(2]OX:29·?公釐&gt; 經濟部中央標準局貞工消費合作社印掣 44074 1 A7 B7五、發明説明(W ) 背側基板2之定向_14和表撕基板1之定向膜18用來限 制各個基板1,2之近傍之定向方向,在該兩個基板1,2之 間Μ指定之杻轉角(例如大致90° &gt;進行扭轉定向。 被配置在面對背側基板2之圖素電極3之位置之彩色 過濾器15R,15G,15B分別形成小於圃素區域Α之面積,因 此,只有各個圖素區域A内之對應到彩色過滤器15R,15G ,15B之區域之有過瀘器區域3成為著色光之射出區域,未 對應到彩色過濾器15R,15G,15B之上逑有遇滹器區域aM 外之無過濾器b,對於從液晶顯示元件前方射入到該元件 被後面側之反射板23反射然後射出到液晶顯示元件之元 件前方之光,不進行著色的使其透過,因此形成非著色 光區域b。在本實施例中,使各色之彩色過瀘器15R,15G, 15B分別形成具有圓素區域A之大約70 χ之面積,和使該 等彩色過灌器15R,15B,15B分別形成在各個圖素區域Α之 周緣部除外之内側區域,因此,各涸圖素區域A之周緣 部在涵蓋其全體周圍形成無過濾器區域b。 另外,相鄰之圖素區域A之間之圖素間區域通常胗成 亮顯示區域上述之敗亂反射板23,棰線10,和資料 線11等反射該射人光,使其射出到元件前方。 在該液晶顧示元件中,因為使各色之彩色過漶器15R, 1 5G , 1 5 B分別形成小於圃素區域A之面積,所Μ在對應到 彩色過濾器之有過濾器區域a,和未對應到彩色過瀘器之 無過滤器區域b中,各個圖素Μ域A内之液晶層LC之層厚 變成不同,相差上述彩色過滤器15R,15G,15B之膜厚部 -35- II - -I - - I -- -I m 1^1 j- ^^1 - - I- - - - I n TT *T (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本瓦) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2丨0 X 297公釐) 經濟部中央橾準局員工消費合作社印策 44074 ! A7 B7五、發明説明(Vf ) 份。 該液晶層LC是將上述圖素區域内之有過濾器區域a之 液晶層之層厚dl和祈射率異方性An之積Audi之值,和 無過濾器區域b之液晶層之層厚d2和折射率異方性△!!之 積^11(12之值設定成對於具有上述ΛπίΠ值之液晶層LC之 液晶元件之分光透過率分布和具有上述And2值之液晶層 LC之液晶元件之分光透過率分布所合成之可視光波長區 域,可以使其分光透過率分布實質上的成為平坦之方式β 因此,該各個圖素匾域Α内之有過濾器區域a之液晶 層厚dl和無過濾器區域b之液晶層厚(12及液晶之折射率 異方性Δη,分別被設定成為對於正常白型之TN液晶顯示 元件之可視光波長區域之特定波長之光,當與透過率&lt; 射出光強度與射入光強度之比)為最大值之△!!“之值比 較時,有過濾器區域a之液晶層之折射率異方性△ η和 層厚(11之積ΛπίΙΙ之值變成較小,和上述無過濾器區域b 之液晶層之折率率Δη和層厚d2之積And2之值變成較大。 亦卽,在本實施例中,對於液晶層之And之值之變化 ,當以透過率(射出光與射入光之強度比)為最大值之 △ nd之值作為△ndO時,將上述有過濾器區域a之Andl 之值和上述無過濾器區域b之之值設定成具有 Δ ndi &lt;△ ndD &lt;△ nd2之醑僳,使上述有過濾器區域a之彩 色過濾器15R,15G,15B成為無色過濾器時之透過率之分光 分布和上述無過濂器區域b之透過率之分光分布雙方進行 合成,合成後之合成分光透過率分布被設定成在可視光 -3 6- ---------裝-- ,(請先吣讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -* 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標隼(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 44074 1 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明 (七;) 1 波 長 區 域 W 質 上 形 成 平 坦 〇 1 1 1 另 外 因 為 液 晶 層 之 Δ n d之 值 變 大 時 透 過 就 顯 著 降 1 i 低 和 分 光 透 過 率 特 性 變 大 所 Η 最 好 是 將 上 述 有 過 m 丄 請 1 I 先 1 器 區 域 a之A r d] 之 值 和 上 述 無 m m 器 區 域 b之△ nd2之 值 閲 讀· 1 背 f 設 定 成 以 上 述 Δ n d 0之值為中心, 在該△ r idO之 值 之 1/2 面 之 i 之 範 圜 〇 注 意 i 事 1 另 外 * 在 上 述 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 » 對 於 液 晶 層 之 Δ n d 項 再 1 1 之 值 之 變 化 * 當 Μ m 過 率 為 最 大 值 之 △ nd之 值 作 為 △ n d 0 填 寫 本 装 時 * 將 各 涸 圖 素 匾 域 A之有過濾器區域a 之 Δ ndl之值和無 頁 1 1 過 m 器 區 域 b之△ η d2之 值 設 定 成 具 有 △ n d 1 &lt; △ ηϋΟ&lt;Δ n d 2 1 1 之 瞄 係 9 當 分 別 使 用 具 有 △ n c 1之值之液晶和具有Λη d2 1 1 之 值 之 液 晶 作 為 被 包 夾 在 一 對 偏 極 光 板 之 具 有 均 一 層 厚 1 訂 1 1 之 液 晶 層 所 形 成 之 液 晶 元 件 時 • 透 過 各 個 液 晶 元 件 之 光 之 分 光 通 過 率 分 布 合 成 後 之 分 光 透 過 率 分 布 , 對 於 可 視 Ί 光 波 長 區 域 之 光 » 被 設 定 成 具 有 實 質 上 平 坦 之 特 性 〇 亦 1 即 » 當 將 上 逑 之 有 過 濾 器 區 域 a 之 彩 色 過 濾 器 15R , 1 5G , J 1 15B替換成無色過濾器時, 使上述有過濾器區域a 之 分 光 ί 透 過 率 分 布 和 上 述 無 V» 趙 m 器 區 域 b 之 分 光 透 過 率 分 布 雙 1 I 方 進 行 合 成 » 因 為 合 成 後 之 分 光 透 通 率 分 布 在 可 視 光 波 1 1 長 區 域 形 成 質 實 上 平 坦 之 方 式 &gt; 所 Μ 利 用 從 有 過 m 器 區 1 1 域 a 射 出 之 著 色 光 和 從 無 過 m 器 區 域 b 射 出 之 非 著 色 光 1 1 所 顯 示 之 彩 色 圖 像 可 m 示 色 平 衡 良 好 之 全 彩 色 匾 像 0 1 1 亦 即 » 在 ΤΝ型 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 光 之 透 過 射 入 側 偏 1 1 極 光 板 射 入 到 液 晶 層 之 直 線 偏 極 光 » 因 為 對 於 該 液 晶 層 I 37 * 1 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 44074 f A7 B7 經濟部中央標隼局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明说明 (訃) 1 之 多 折 射 性 具 有 波 長 相 瞄 性 f 所 以 利 用 旋光 分 敗 使 各 個 1 ί 1 波 長 光 接 受 不 同 旋 光 作 用 , 因 此 透 過 上 述液 晶 層 之 光 » 1 1 在 可 視 光 波 長 區 域 之 各 個 波 長 光 其 振 動 面會 有 稍 微 之 偏 請 先 i 1 差 透 過 射 出 側 m 極 光 板 之 光 之 分 光 強 度分 布 不 會 平 坦 閲。 讀 1 背 1 r 稍 微 著 色 的 進 行 射 出 〇 &amp; 之 1 該 射 出 光 之 著 色 之 程 度 與 液 晶 層 之 Δ n d之 值 具 有 相 瞄 注 意 ί I 事 1 性 〇 項 再 ! 填 另 外 * 在 上 述 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 « 因 為使 各 個 之 彩 色 寫 本 裝 過 濾 器 15R, 1 5G , 15B之面積小於圖素區域A之 面 積 所 Η 頁 1 1 在 圖 素 區 域 A 中 之 彩 色 過 m 器 15R , 1 5G , 15B所對懕之有 1 Ι 過 濾 器 a , 存 在 有 上 述 之 彩 色 過 m 器 15R , 15G , 1 5B , 在 無 過 I 1 濾 器 區 域 b 未 存 在 有 上 述 之 彩 色 過 漶 器 15R , 15G , 15B , 因 1 訂 1 I 此 上 述 有 過 濾 器 區 域 a之液晶層厚比無過漶器區域b之 液 晶 層 厚 薄 9 相 差 該 彩 色 過 濾 器 之 厚 度 之 部份 〇 因 此 1 有 1 過 m 器 區 域 a 之 液 晶 曆 之 △ ndl和無過濾器區域b 之液 I 晶 層 之 Δ nd2之值成為不同之值, 所Μ透過有過漶器區 I 域 a 之 光 和 透 過 無 過 m 器 區 域 b 之 光 具 有不 同 之 分 光 透 i vin 率 分 布 I 從 各 個 區 域 射 出 被 著 色 成 不 同色 之 光 〇 1 | 第 1 4圖 表 示 在 具 備 有 被 包 夾 在 一 對 偏 極光 板 之 均 一 層 1 1 厚 之 液 晶 層 9 未 具 備 有 彩 色 遇 m 器 之 正 常白 模 態 之 TN型 1 I 液 晶 顧 示 元 件 中 當 Μ 無 電 埸 吠 態 使 Δ n d之 值 變 化 時 之 1 I 透 過 率 之 變 化 (Δ η d — 1遇率特朽 &quot; 〇 第 15圃 擴 大 的 表 示 1 1 第 14圖 所 示 之 △ n d —S 過 率 特 性 之 最 初 出琨 之 尖 峰 附 近 1 I 〇 另 外 ♦ 在 第 14圖 和 第 15圖 中 » 縱 軸 之 透過 率 之 值 是 射 1 I 38 1 i 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準{ CNS &gt; A4規格(210X297公釐) 44 07Λ f B7 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明(Μ ) 出光強度/射入光強度之比。 如該等第14匾和第15圖所示,液晶顧示元件之透過率 皤著ΔηίΙ之值之變化,K具有多俚最大值之方式進行變 化,當液晶層具有表示透過率之最大值之And之值時, 其反襯亦變高。 本實腌例之液晶顧示元件是以第15圖所示之表示反親 為最大值之And之值作為AndO,將上述之有遇濾器區 域a之Δη(Π之值和上述無過濾器區域b之^^2之值設定 成為Andl小於上述之最佳ΔηΜ,和And2大於上述之 最佳Λη&lt;10。例如,在最佳為527〜528nm之情況時 ,有過濾器區域a之Andl之值大約為432na,上逑無過 漶器區域b之And〗之值大約為558nin。 第16圖表示在本實施例之硖晶顥示元件中,除去彩色 過濾器15R,15G,15B及對吸收波長區域之影響,只利用 液晶層之分光透過率分布。亦即,表示將本實施例之液 晶顯示元件所使用之彩色過瀘器15R,15G,15B替換成未 具有吸收波長區域之無色過滹器,當將Andl和Atid2之 值設定成對△ ndO (527 〜528na)具有 Α η&lt;Π&lt;Δ ndO&lt;A nd2 之M係時之有過瀘器區域a和無過濾器區域b之分光透 過率分布。上述Audi和Δη(!2之值分別為Andl = 432nm, △ nd2 = 558nnt,有過漶器區域a之液晶層厚dl和無過濾 器區域b之液晶層d2和液晶之折射率異方性Δη分別被 設定為 ίΠ=4·8ϋ», d2 = 6.2i/in, ^^ = 0.09,另外,將有 過濾器區域a之面積率設定為圖素區域A之面積之70 χ。 &quot;3 9 - (諳先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2IOX 297公釐) 440741 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作杜印製 A7 B7五、發明説明(分) 依照第16圖,將有過濾器區域a和無過濾器匾域b之 Andl, And之設定成對上述最佳ΛηίΙΟ之值具有AndK △ ndO&lt;And2之關偽,用來使匾域a之波長區域和匾域b 之波長區域産生偏移,該區域a之波長區域從之 值朝向變小之一方偏移之值,在上述之有過濾器 區域a之分光透過率分布中出現尖峰,該區域b之波長 區域從ZindO之值朝向變大之一方偏移Δηάΐ之值,在無 過濾器區域b之分光透過率分布中出現尖峰。有過濾器 區域a之分光分布曲線在可視光波長區域之短波長區域 具有尖峰,在長波長區域使透過率降低。另外一方面, 無過濾器區域b之分光分布曲線在可視光波長區域之長 波長區域具有尖峰,在短波長區域使透過率降低。 在一個圖素匾域内因為該雙方之分光透過率分布進行 合成的觀察,所以2痼分光透過率分互相補償,用來使 可視光波長區域之分光透過率分布變為平坦,不會由於 液晶層而産生透過光之著色,可以獲得高色純度之顯示 元件。 第17圖以實線表示上述液晶顯示元件之有過濾器區域 a和無過濾器匾域b雙方之分光透過率分布合成後之合 成分光透過率分布,在該圖中亦顯示有比較例1(REF,1&gt; 和 2 ( R E F,2 ) 0 比較例1之△ ndl和^11(12之值分別為△ ndl = 528nm(大 致等於△“0&gt;,^11012 = 6821111,液晶之 Δη之值為 Δπ = 0. 11 。比較例2之△ ndl和Δ nd2之值分別為A nd2 = 527nie(大致 -4 0 - (請先Μ·讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標率(CNS ) Α4規格(2】0 X 297公釐) 44074 1 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局—工消費合作社印^ 五、發明説明(巧) 等於△ n d 0 ) , A n d 1 = 4 0 8 n b ,液晶之△ η 之值為△ η = 0 . 0 8 5 。在該等比較例1,2中,液晶層厚dl,d2和有過滹器區域 a附圈素區域之比例分別被設定為(Π = 4.8/ί B,d2=6.2u a ,和 70*。 依照第17圖,本實施例之液晶顏示元件之合成分光透 過率分布特性和茛線所示,在涵蓋可視光波長區域之全 體區域變為大致平坦,不會有透過光之帶色。與此相對 的,比較例〗之合成分光透過率分布特性和該圖之鐽線 所示,大約500〜600nB之波長區域之光之透過率最高, 其短波長蜊和長波畏側之透過率均較低,因此,透過光 變成帶有綠色之帶色光。 另外,比較例2之合成分光透過率分布特性如該圖之 虚線所示,其短波長側之透過率變低,長波長側之透過 率變高,因此,透過光變成帶有黃色之帶色光。 因此.如本實施例之液晶顗示元件所示,因為設有紅 ,綠,Μ之彩色過滅器15I?,15G,15B,考慮到該等彩色過 濾器之光學作用,透過各個圈素區域A之上述有過濾器 區域a和無過濾器區域b之2個區域之液晶曆之光之合 成變成白色,所Μ在每一個圔素區域A,各色之彩色過滹 器之著色光不會受液晶層之影響而使著色混亂,因此各 假圈素之色純度變高,可Μ獲得色彩鲜明之顯示元件。 另外,液晶顯示元件之無電場狀態之透過率依照And 之值如第14匾所示的變化,光之透過率成為最大之And 之值存在有多個,上述Δγ^Ο之值最好選用當考慮到反 -4 1 - (諳先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ297公嫠〉 440741 A7 經濟部中央標隼局員工消资合作社印製 B7五、發明説明(# ) 襯和回應特性時,於And進行變大之最初出現之透過率 之尖峰,或其次出現之尖峰所對應之△ nd之值。 另外,為箸防止有過濾器厝域a和無過濾器區域b産 生液晶層厚度差,所以對於如第2圈所示由於形成在表 傅基板1之内面之彩色過濾器15R,15G,15B而造成之凹凸 面形狀,經由在其上覆蓋保護膜17可以用來使其平坦。 另外,在上逑之第1實施例中,互相面對之一對基板 之定向處理是在表倒和背倒基板1,2之内面,亦即在各 籲圖素電搔3和面對電極18之上,涵蓋顯示區域金體的 設置由聚醯亞胺等製成之定向膜14, 19,在該等定向膜14 ,19,以指定之方向摩擦其膜面藉以施加定向處理。在該 兩掴基板1,2間設置向列液晶層LC,上述之液晶分子利 用被設在該兩個基板1,2之内面之定向膜14, 19用來限制 基板1,2之近傍之定向方向,在該兩锢基板1,2之間以大 致9 0 °之扭轉角進行扭轉定向。 另外,偏極光板被配置成使表倒基板1之前面之表槲 偏極光板21和背倒基板2之後面之背御偏極光板22分別 以其吸收軸正交,以液晶層進行扭轉定向之狀態作為明 亮顯示之正常白顯示狀態。定向狀態和偏搔光板之配置 如第1 8圖之詳示。 第18画是本實施例之液晶顯示元件之斜視画。在第18 圖中,箭頭la,2 a表示基板1,2之近傍之液晶分子之定向 方向。另外,在該液晶顯示元件30中,在一對基板1,2 之背制基板2之近傍,對上述液晶單元31之液晶之分子 -4 2 - (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2t〇X297公釐) 440741 A7 B7 刼漭部中头標準局K工消费合竹社印灰 五、發明説明 (4 ' ! 1 進 向 定 向 t 其 定 向 方 向 是 從 表 面 基 板 1 側 看 時 對 水 平 方 1 I | 向 (楢軸X)在轉大ί 冷0 ° 小 於 45° 之 角 度 範 圍 内 之 方 向 » 1 1 和 從 上 述 背 俩 基 板 2 朝 向 表 側 基 板 1 白 元 件 前 方 看 時 Μ 誚 1 先 1 右 轉 大 約 9C 1 ° 之 扭 轉 角 進 行 扭 轉 定 向 〇 閲- 讀 1 背 1 上 述 背 側 基 板 之 近 傍 之 液 晶 分 子 之 定 向 方 向 2 3 之 設 定 面 ί 之 1 是 依 照 射 入 光 (有效射入光) 之 射 入 角 * 該 射 人 光 是 從 液 注 意 金 1 I 晶 顯 示 元 件 30 之 .X. 刖 面 射 人 1 被 反 射 板 23反 射 » 然 後 射 出 Ψ 項 再 1 1 到 上 述 顬 示 面 之 光 中 之 反 射 到 親 察 者 側 最 強 之 射 出 光 〇 填 寫 本 裝 I 在 本 實 施 例 中 * 當 從 有 效 觀 察 之 m 示 面 之 上 緣 方 向 射 頁 1 I 入 之 光 之 射 人 角 (對顯示面之垂直方向所形成之角度) 為 1 1 I 30 〇 之 情 況 時 * 依 下 述 之 方 向 用 來 設 定 液 晶 單 元 31 之 背 1 1 側 基 板 2 之 近 傍 之 液 晶 分 子 之 定 向 方 向 2a 〇 1 訂 亦 即 , 如 第 18 圖 所 示 9 液 晶 單 元 31 之 後 側 基 板 2 之 近 I 傍 之 液 晶 分 子 之 定 向 方 向 2 a 是 從 表 脚 基 板 1 看 時 對 水 平 1 方 向 (横袖X)左轉大約25° 之偏移方向 ) 1 另 外 在 本 實 腌 例 中 * 依 照 上 述 背 俩 基 板 2 之 近 傍 之 1 1 液 晶 分 子 之 定 方 向 2 a ,將液晶單元31之表側基板1 之 近 1 傍 之 液 晶 分 子 之 定 向 方 向 13設 定 成 為 該 元 件 前 方 看 時 對 1 I 該 定 向 方 向 2 a 左 轉 大 約 90 〇 之 偏 移 方 向 亦 即 9 從 元 件 1 1 前 方 看 時 對 上 述 之 横 軸 X 左 轉 大 約 11 5。 (25 〇 + 90 ° ) 之 1 | 偏 移 方 向 〇 另 外 t 液 晶 分 子 Μ 背 側 基 板 2 之 近 傍 之 定 向 1 I 方 向 2a 作 為 基 準 , 當 從 上 述 之 背 側 基 板 2 朝 向 表 側 基 板 1 1 1 自 元 件 前 方 看 時 Μ 右 轉 大 妁 90 〇 之 扭 轉 角 進 行 扭 轉 定 1 I 向 0 1 i 43 &lt; 1 1 i 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2 lOx 297公犛) r 4^〇7 41 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局员工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明 v ) 1 1 另 外 » 在 本 實 腌 例 中 將 上 述 之 反 射 板 23配 置 成 可 Μ 獲 1 1 | 得 垂 直 方 向 之 高 反 射 率 使 射 入 方 向 大 致 平 行 於 液 晶 顯 1 1 示 元 件 30之 顯 示 面 之 垂 直 方 向 (縱袖Y), 可以有效的反 請 先 1 射 來 白 上 述 有 效 射 人 光 之 射 入 方 向 之 顯 示 面 之 斜 上 方 之 閱 讀 背 i 射 入 光 * 將 其 射 出 到 顯 示 面 之 正 面 方 向 〇 [ 之 1 另 外 * 在 上 述 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 30中 » 因 為 將 液 晶 單 元 注 意 重 1 I 31 之 液 晶 之 分 子 定 向 在 背 側 基 板 2 之 顯 示 面 之 横 袖 X 之 爭 項 再 1 從 元 件 前 方 看 左 轉 大 約 25 〇 之 角 度 方 向 * &gt;1 其 定 向 方 向 填 寫 本 裝 I 2 a 作 為 基 準 » 對 於 液 晶 分 子 1 Μ 從 上 述 背 側 基 板 2 朝 向 頁 ··, 1 1 表 if 基 板 1 自 元 件 刖 方 看 右 轉 大 約 90 〇 之 扭 轉 角 進 行 扭 1 1 1 轉 定 向 9 所 即 使 在 反 射 型 之 ΤΝ液 晶 顯 示 元 件 時 對 於 1 1 從 上 述 通 常 觀 察 方 向 所 観 察 到 之 顧 示 &gt; 亦 可 Μ 確 保 具 有 i 訂 1 充 分 之 反 襯 » 和 具 有 充 分 之 亮 度 另 外 上 述 實 腌 例 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 30 之 視 角 是 從 元 件 1 前 方 看 時 在 左 轉 大 約 70 〇 之 鰌 移 方 向 t 但 是 該 方 向 亦 可 1 Μ 是 從 垂 直 顯 示 面 之 方 向 看 時 成 為 顯 示 面 之 斜 向 右 下 之 1 [ 方 向 » 視 角 之 方 向 只 要 在 這 附 近 時 從 通 常 之 観 察 方 向 1 (亦即比垂直於顯示面之方向稍微斜向顯示面之下緣方 1 I 向 之 方 向 )觀察到之顯示之反襯, 當與視角為顯示面之 1 ί 正 下 方 向 之 習 知 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 比 較 時 不 會 遜 色 , 可 以 1 i 確 保 具 有 充 分 之 反 襯 〇 1 I 因 此 上 述 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 30之 液 晶 單 元 31 之 液 晶 分 子 1 1 之 定 向 狀 態 可 Μ 設 計 成 將 從 顯 示 面 之 斜 上 方 射 入 之 有 效 t I 射 入 光 之 射 入 角 規 定 在 20 a 30 〇 之 範 圍 内 之 任 意 之 角 1 1 44 1 ,.丨 1 t 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4规格(210X 297公釐) 44074 1 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印^ 五、發明説明 1 1 度 〇 I 1 另 外 * 第 19圈 是 斜 視 圖 9 用 來 表 示 另 外 一 個 之 實 腌 例 I I 〇 第 1£ 1圖 之 實 例 是 使 從 斜 上 方 射 人 到 表 側 基 板 1 之 * 刖 面 請 1 先 之 光 之 反 射 光 中 之 有 效 射 入 光 之 射 入 角 成 為 2C )° 〇 在 使 閲* 讀 1 I 観 察 者 観 察 有 效 射 入 光 之 射 入 角 成 為 2C )° 之 本 實 施 例 之 背 面 1 | 之 1 疲 晶 顯 示 元 件 3C ,中 , 液 晶 單 元 31 之 背 側 基 板 2 之 近 傍 之 注 意 1 事 1 液 晶 分 子 之 定 向 方 向 2a Μ 下 述 方 式 之 方 向 進 行 設 定 〇 項 再 1 亦 即 * 如 第 19圖 所 示 » 液 晶 單 元 31 之 背 側 基 板 2 之 近 填 寫 本 裝 I 傍 之 液 晶 分 子 之 定 向 方 向 2 a 是 從 元 件 前 方 看 時 對 水 平 方 頁 1 1 向 (横軸X)在轉大約1 0。 之偏移方向 1 1 另 外 » 在 本 實 施 例 中 » 依 照 上 述 背 側 基 板 2 之 近 傍 之 ! 1 液 晶 分 子 之 定 向 方 向 2a 將 液 晶 單 元 31 之 表 側 基 板 1 之 I 訂 近 傍 之 液 晶 分 子 之 定 向 方 向 la 設 定 成 為 從 元 件 前 方 看 時 1 對 該 定 向 方 向 2a 左 轉 大 約 90 〇 之 偏 移 方 向 亦 即 % 從 元 1 件 前 方 看 時 對 水 平 方 向 (横軸50左轉大約1 00 〇 (10。 十 | 90 〇 )之偏移方向, 液晶分子K背側基板2 之近傍之定向 1 1 方 向 28 作 為 基 準 % 當 從 上 述 之 背 俩 基 板 2 朝 向 表 側 基 板 1 1 自 元 件 前 方 看 時 右 轉 大 約 90 〇 之 扭 轉 角 進 行 扭 轉 定 1 J 向 〇 1 1 另 外 t 此 等 實 施 例 是 使 從 顯 示 面 之 斜 上 方 射 人 之 光 之 1 I 反 射 光 中 之 觀 察 者 観 察 到 之 有 效 射 入 光 之 射 人 角 成 為 20。 1 1 之 實 例 » 因 為 有 效 之 射 入 光 在 —1 般 之 情 況 時 對 顯 示 面 之 1 1 垂 直 方 向 W 大 約 20 0 大 約 30 〇 之 角 度 範 圍 内 之 傾 斜 角 1 I 射 入 到 上 述 顯 示 面 之 上 緣 方 向 之 光 所 以 在 本 實 施 例 之 1 45 1 Ί‘ 1 本紙張尺度適用十國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 44 074 1 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印製II Λ This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 × 297 mm) 4 7 ο 4 4 The product of the time-varying nature of the filter S filter 1. Excessive filter for the average range B range t (color. (G, R on t) shows the t-thickness picture film 1A «1 of the B 0 Λί filter The color of the color 2 The blue and the edge are sexual characteristics. The line shown in the figure is the solid rate product surface of the fixed solid separator. The filter color is red, so that only the time will change into blue and red. IG Μϋ (Special R of special s') shows the line product of S rate _ surface rate product 2 of the surface ο 8 Specially timed curing Do not change branches &gt; enter 1 R R 5-1 color filter green filter Make the color only color, 0% iy color, (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Installation · Characteristic; Special quotation \ / \ »/ cd Β / V / (V &quot; s S The product of the rate and line product of the virtual surface-1 into R, 濂 5 11 1 The color filter is blue, and the color is only 0%. Two W = Μ a γ is the degree of specialization of 1 The combination of color and photosynthesis display chart changes the rate of the surface integration filter to filter the order of the characteristics of the special characteristics of the special G) R) / f \ / 1. Shows the ss rate of the line of the accumulation of the real surface 1 Device C5 1 The filter color is red and the color is only 0%, the color β is Μ 2 is to be fixed 1 ^ ^ ^ is Β to Λ, the central standard bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, I industrial consumer cooperatives, and the RG of RG / iv f% shows the ss rate of the product of the product of the line product chain of -7 — Progressiveness, treat s, \! / \ Iy of the RB / | \ * w, not the rate of the U of the product of the rate of s S The first surface of the product is 1 of the filter R 'filter 5 rl 1 The filter color filter is used to make the color only 0%, and the color property is 2 until the second Μ inJlif is red &quot; 化 是 Ϊ # 器5R filter. 1S filter blue color, 0% of κ. Color y ^ ^ ^ £ jla® Others &gt; Illustrated in the U line. This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (2IOX 297 mm). Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 11 44 4 t Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (β) When the area ratio of the edge color filter (key line) is close to 6 0 5 £, the chromaticity of the mixed light (C = 0 becomes the minimum, and the blue filter (dashed line) of the The chromaticity (C *) of the mixed light becomes the smallest area ratio, which is higher than the chromaticity (0 * &gt; of the mixed light) of the edge color filter (key line). The chromaticity (C *) of the mixed light becomes the smallest area ratio, which is higher than the chromaticity (C *) of the mixed light that is higher than that of the blue filter (dashed line). Figure 11C shows the mixed light. Luminance (L *) change characteristic of filter area ratio. In the figure, the characteristic shown by the solid line is the area ratio S (G &gt;, S (B &gt; Fixed respectively at 80J: only when the area ratio S (ii) of the red filter 15R is changed, the nature shown by the key line is red and blue The area ratios S (R &gt;, S (B) of the color detectors 15R, 15B are fixed to 80X, respectively, and only the area ratio S (G) of the green filter 15G is changed. The area ratios S (R) and S (G) of the color filters 15R and 15G of red and two colors are fixed at 80! Ϊ, respectively, when only the area ratio S (B) of the blue filter 15B is changed. In the UC picture, it is shown that when the area ratio of the filters of each color becomes smaller, the brightness (L *) of the mixed light becomes larger. Therefore, the liquid crystal display element of this night's example is based on the eleventh group B. The area ratio of the filter is set to increase according to the order of the green filter, blue filter, and red filter, and according to Figure 11A and 11C Figure -3 0-\ Read the notes on the back to read (Fill in this page again) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) v. 44 07 4 1 at B7 ) Ί 1 I Set the area ratio of each of the above-mentioned filters so that neither the color range sugar nor the brightness (L *) value of the mixed 1 1 I light It becomes smaller. 1 I In addition, the above 10th and 11th and 11th ABI. '• 11C Figure / — ^ Please indicate the color range and brightness of the mixed light (C *) shown by 1 I and the brightness first. Reading | 1 value The mixed light contains: red, margin, and blue ochre light from the 1 i exit region of the back-colored light emitted from each of the prime regions A; pay attention to 1 I; Coming matter 1 The non-black-colored light that emits the light emitted from the hidden area b is from the term between the β prime plaques and 1 m from the non-black-colored light that is emitted from the prime area. Fill out this Λ. As described above, use 1 ^ 圏 ~ Figures 12C_ and 13A 圜 ~ Page 1 I 13c are used to show when the color filters 15R, 1 56, and 15B of each frame are 1 1 thick t (R), t (G), t (B) The sum of the quotients S (R), S (G), and sum is set at various values of 1 1 on the color range of CIE 1976 L * a * b * c 〇1 〇r sy st eb and 1 order 1 1 mixed light Chroma (C *) and brightness (L *) values. The characteristics shown in the 12th group to the 12th group are the red filter 15R »[1 area ratio S (R), the line color filter 15G area ratio S (G), and the basket color filter a 1 I 15B The surface area ratio S (B) is fixed as S (R) = 90%, S (β) = 60X, S (B) = 75% 1 i and the film thickness t of the red filter 15R), the edge color filter The film thickness of the filter 15G «Ί 1 thickness t (G), and the film thickness difference t (B) of the blue filter 15B has 1 I color filter film thickness t (G &gt; = t (R) -〇 1 0 ju α 1 1 The blue filter has a thickness of t (B) (R) -0. 2 0 # · 1 t. The various changes in time. The representative value of the horizontal _ in the figure is red 1 I filter The film thickness t (R) of the device. 1 1 Figure 12 A shows the change characteristics of the color range, circle 1 2B shows the change persistence of the chromaticity (C *) of the mixed 1 I light, and Figure 12 C shows the mixing Brightness of light j 1 I -3 1-1 _ _ 1 • 1 This paper size applies to the Chinese national standard CNS &gt; A4 size (2 丨 〇 乂 297 mm) 44074 f Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the China Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs System A7 B7 V. Invention Theory (Mustard) (L *). Figure 12A shows that when the film thickness of the red filter is less than 0.9 // *, it needs to display many colors for full-color display. The value of the color plaque is less than 750, when When the film thickness is in the range of 0.9 # B or more and 1.2 # π or less, the color range exceeds the value of? 50. In addition, FIG. 12B shows that when the film thickness of the red filter is 0.9 # B or more and approximately 1.2 # β or less In the range, the value of the chromaticity (C *) of the mixed light (white light) needs to be displayed in uncolored white. Therefore, the chromaticity (C *) becomes a value of 1.5 or less β. In addition, 12C means that when the film thickness of the red filter is in the range of 0.3 # a or more and 1 · 2αβ or less, the brightness (L *) of the mixed light (white light) is very bright, so the brightness is U *) It becomes a value of 52 or more. The characteristics shown in circles 13A to 13C are the film thickness t (R) of the red filter 15R, the film thickness UG of the edge filter 15G, and the film thickness t of the blue filter 15B ( B &gt; fixed at t (R) = 1.0; un, 1: (6) = 0.9 ^ m, t (B) = 1.2 # β, and the area ratio S (R) of the red filter 15R, edge color The area ratio S (G) of the filter 15G and the area ratio S (B) of the blue filter 15B are based on the edge filter area ratio S (G &gt; = S (R) -303; the blue filter area ratio The relationship between S (B) = S (R) -15X makes the area ratio of each color have a certain percentage difference, which is consistent when changing the area ratio. The representative value of the horizontal axis in the figure is the area of the red filter Rate S (R). Figure 13A shows the change in color range, Figure 13B shows the chromaticity of the mixed light (CM change characteristics, and Figure 13C shows the brightness of the mixed light (L *) -32- (please first Read the notes on the reverse side and fill out this page) 'Package. The size of the paper is applicable to the Chinese national standard ( &lt;: &gt; ^) 6 4 specifications (210 乂 297 mm) Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs 44〇74ί Α7 Β7 V. The description of the invention (W) is subject to change. Figure 13A shows that when the area ratio of the red filter is less than 90%, it is necessary to display many colors for full-color display. The value of the above color range of each display color becomes less than 750. When the area ratio of the red filter is more than 30 × The value of the color range of the upper part of the time exceeds 750. In addition, the 13th drawing shows that when the area ratio of the red filter is in the range of 80% or more and 1QQ56 or less, the above-mentioned chromaticity (C *) of the mixed light (white light) of each color essentially requires uncolored white beetle, so The chromaticity (C *) becomes a value β of 1.5 or less. In addition, FIG. 13C shows that when the area ratio of the red filter is 80 X or more, the above-mentioned brightness (L *) of the mixed light (white light) of each color is required. The display is very bright, so the brightness (L *) becomes a value of 52 or more "&gt; In addition, the color range and the chromaticity of the mixed light shown in Figs. 12A to 12C and 13A to 13C ( C *) and brightness are the values of mixed light. The mixed light includes: red, edge, and blue ochre light from the corresponding area a of the filter region A of each elementary region; The non-colored light of the emitted light; and the non-colored light of the emitted light from the bright display area W between adjacent pixel regions. The upper 12A to 12C and 13A to 13C _ are shown in accordance with the settings. The color range of the liquid crystal display element of various values and the chromaticity of the mixed light (C *) and When the value of brightness (L *), the area of the color range of the a * b * face of the CIE 1976 L * a * b * color system becomes approximately the maximum, and the chromaticity of the mixed light of red light, edge light, and blue light ( C *) becomes approximately minimum, and the brightness (L *) of the above-mentioned mixed light becomes very bright. At this time, the filter film-3 3- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page} This paper size applies to Chinese national standards {CNS &gt; A4 size (210X297mm) Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives ^ 44074 1 at B7 V. Description of the invention (^) Thickness and excess «Area ratio (ratio to the area of the prime area A) ) It is best to have a red filter film thickness t (R) = 0.9 ~ 1.2wb, a green filter film thickness t (G) = 0.8 ~ 1.1, a blue filter film thickness t (B) = ll ~ 1.4μ b Red filter area ratio S (R) = 90 ~ 95S; green filter area ratio S (G) = 60 ~ 65X blue filter area ratio S (B) = 75 ~ 80X The film thicknesses of the oil heaters 15R, 15G, and 15B are UR), UG) .UB) and the area ratios S (RKS (G), S (B) are set to the values in the above range. A lot of frost must be displayed when full color display is performed. Color, so make the above color range The value of the area becomes 750M. The chromaticity (C *) of the above-mentioned mixed light is substantially uncolored, and the chromaticity (CO becomes 1.5 or less), and the above-mentioned mixed light brightness (L *) Because a very bright display is required, the brightness (L *) becomes a value greater than 52. That is, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display element is on the CIE 1976 color sysfcea shown in the ninth group. RC, the color coordinates of green light, GC, and the color coordinates of blue light. BC is connected to form a triangle. The area of the color range surrounded by the triangle is approximately the largest (at 7 50M), and the chromaticity of its mixed light (C is very close to a). = 0, b * = 0 value of the C light source (C * = 1 · 5 M). Therefore, according to the above-mentioned liquid crystal display element, the chromaticity (C *) and color balance of each color of red, green, and blue will not be deteriorated, and the transmittance of light can be increased to make the screen very bright, which can display good daylight. Quality full color image. In addition, in the first embodiment of the above example, the above-mentioned liquid crystal layer uses -3 4-— _ I--H —--HI —I II ----. I --- ^^ 1 '{Please (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Regulation "Class (2) OX: 29 ·? Mm &gt; Zhengong Consumer Cooperatives, Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, PRC 44074 1 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (W) Orientation 14 of the back substrate 2 and the orientation film 18 of the torn substrate 1 are used to limit the orientation directions of the substrates 1 and 2. The rotation angle specified by the interval M (for example, approximately 90 ° &gt; torsional orientation. The color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B arranged at positions facing the pixel electrode 3 of the back-side substrate 2 form smaller than the pixel area A, respectively. Area, therefore, only the areas in each pixel area A corresponding to the color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B have the filter area 3 as the colored light emission areas, which do not correspond to the color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B. There is no filter b outside the receiver area aM on the upper side. For the liquid crystal display element entering from the front to the element, it is reflected by the reflective plate 23 on the rear side. The light emitted to the front of the element of the liquid crystal display element is transmitted without being colored, thereby forming a non-colored light region b. In this embodiment, the color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B of each color are formed to have circles, respectively. An area of approximately 70 χ of the pixel area A, and the color overfillers 15R, 15B, and 15B are formed in inner areas excluding the peripheral edge portion of each pixel area A. Therefore, the peripheral edge portion of each pixel area A A filter-free area b is formed around the entire area. In addition, the inter-pixel area between adjacent pixel areas A is usually formed into a bright display area. The above-mentioned messy reflectors 23, lines 10, and data lines 11 Wait until the incident light is reflected so that it is emitted to the front of the element. In this liquid crystal display element, because the color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B of each color are formed to have an area smaller than that of the prime region A, respectively. The layer thickness of the liquid crystal layer LC in each pixel M domain A becomes different between the filter area a corresponding to the color filter and the non-filter area b not corresponding to the color filter, which is different from the color filter described above. 15R, 15G, 15B Filter Thickness -35- II- -I--I--I m 1 ^ 1 j- ^^ 1--I----I n TT * T (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this tile) The paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumers Cooperative of the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China 44074! A7 B7 V. Invention Description (Vf) copies. The liquid crystal layer LC is a The product of the product of the thickness dl of the liquid crystal layer with the filter area a and the thickness anisotropy An of the product Audi, and the product of the layer thickness d2 of the liquid crystal layer without the filter area b and the refractive index anisotropy △ !! The value of ^ 11 (12 is set to the visible light wavelength region synthesized by the spectral transmittance distribution of the liquid crystal element of the liquid crystal layer LC having the above ΛπίΠ value and the spectral transmittance distribution of the liquid crystal element of the liquid crystal layer LC having the above And2 value. The spectral transmittance distribution can be made substantially flat β. Therefore, the thickness of the liquid crystal layer dl in the filter region a and the thickness of the liquid crystal layer in the filterless region b (12 and The refractive index anisotropy Δη is set to be visible to a normally white TN liquid crystal display element. Wavelength of light of a specific wavelength area, and the transmittance when &lt; The ratio of the intensity of the emitted light to the intensity of the incident light) is the maximum value △ !! "When the values are compared, the refractive index anisotropy of the liquid crystal layer with the filter region a and the layer thickness (product of 11 ΛπίΙΙ The value becomes smaller, and the value of the product And2 of the refractive index Δη and the thickness d2 of the liquid crystal layer in the filterless region b becomes larger. Also, in this embodiment, the value of And for the liquid crystal layer For the change, when the value of Δnd as the maximum value of the transmittance (the ratio of the intensity of the emitted light to the incident light) is taken as ΔndO, the value of Andl of the above-mentioned filter area a and the value of the above-mentioned non-filter area b The value is set to have Δ ndi &lt; △ ndD &lt; △ nd2, both of the spectral distribution of the transmittance when the color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B with the filter area a become colorless filters and the spectral distribution of the transmittance without the filter area b After synthesis, the synthesized spectral transmittance distribution is set to visible light-3 6- --------- install-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)-* This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 44074 1 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (VII;) 1 The wavelength region W is flat in quality. 1 1 1 In addition, when the value of Δ nd of the liquid crystal layer becomes larger, the transmission will decrease significantly. 1 i Low and the spectral transmittance characteristics will increase. It is better to have the above over m 丄 Please 1 I first 1 A of the device area a rd] and the value of △ nd2 of the above-mentioned mm-free zone b. 1 The back f is set to be centered on the value of Δ nd 0 In the range of 1/2 of the value of Δ r idO, i. Note i matter 1 In addition * In the above-mentioned liquid crystal display element »For the Δ nd term of the liquid crystal layer, the value of 1 1 is changed * When M m The value of △ nd of the maximum value is △ nd 0 When filling in this package * The value of Δ ndl of the filter area a and the pageless 1 1 of each pixel area of the plaque plaque A The value of η d2 is set to have △ nd 1 &lt; △ ηϋΟ &lt; Δ nd 2 1 1 aiming system 9 When using a liquid crystal with a value of △ nc 1 and a liquid crystal with a value of Δη d2 1 1 as the thicknesses of a uniform layer sandwiched between a pair of polarizing plates 1 Order 1 In the case of a liquid crystal element formed by a liquid crystal layer of 1 • The spectral transmittance distribution of the light transmittance distribution of the light transmitted through each liquid crystal element is synthesized, and the light in the visible wavelength region is set to have a substantially flat characteristic. 1 That is, when the color filters 15R, 1 5G, and J 1 15B with the filter area a on the upper side are replaced with the colorless filters, the transmittance distribution of the above-mentioned filter area a and the above-mentioned non-V » Zhao m device area b splits the spectral transmittance distribution double 1 I side to synthesize »because the synthesized spectral transmittance distribution in the visible light wave 1 1 long area forms a solid and flat way &gt; the M uses the device Zone 1 1 Domain a The colored light and the non-colored light emitted from the non-millitron region b 1 1 can display the color image m. Full color plaque with good color balance 0 1 1 That is »In the TN type liquid crystal display element Transmission of light into the side polarized 1 1 polarized light polarized straight into the liquid crystal layer »Because for this liquid crystal layer I 37 * 1 1 1 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm ) 44074 f A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (讣) The multi-refractive index of 1 has wavelength sighting f. Therefore, the optical rotation is used to make each 1 ί 1 wavelength light receive different optical rotation. Therefore, the light passing through the above liquid crystal layer »1 1 The vibration surface of each wavelength of light in the visible light wavelength region will be slightly deviated. Please first i 1 the light intensity distribution of the light transmitted through the m polarizer on the exit side will not be flat. Reading. Read 1 back 1 r to emit lightly colored 0 & 1 The degree of coloring of the emitted light is consistent with the value of Δ nd of the liquid crystal layer. Note that I matter 1 is 0! Then fill in * In the above liquid crystal In the display element «Because the size of each color copy filter 15R, 1 5G, 15B is smaller than the area of the pixel area A Η Page 1 1 The color filter 15R, 1 5G, 15B in the pixel area A There are 1 I filters a, and the above-mentioned color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B exist, and the above-mentioned color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B do not exist in the area without the I 1 filter. 1 Order 1 I The thickness of the liquid crystal layer in the above-mentioned filter region a is thinner than the thickness of the liquid crystal layer in the non-filter region b. 9 The part that differs from the thickness of the color filter. Therefore, 1 has the LCD history of the filter region a. Of △ The values of Δ nd2 of the liquid I crystal layer of ndl and the filterless region b are different values, and the light transmitted through the filter region I and the light passing through the filterless region b has different optical transmission. i vin rate distribution I emits light colored in different colors from each area. 01 | Fig. 14 shows that there is a 1 1 thick liquid crystal layer 9 with a uniform layer sandwiched between a pair of polarizing plates. 9 does not have color In the normal white mode of the TN device, the TN type 1 I liquid crystal display element has a change in the transmittance of 1 I when the M non-electrical bark state changes the value of Δ nd (Δ η d — 1 case rate is extremely bad &quot; 〇 15th enlarged display 1 1 △ nd —S near the peak of the initial peak of the over-rate characteristic shown in FIG. 14 1 I 〇 In addition ♦ In FIGS. 14 and 15 »The vertical axis of transmission The value is shot 1 I 38 1 i 1 This paper size applies to the Chinese national standard {CNS &gt; A4 size (210X297 mm) 44 07Λ f B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (M) The ratio of the light intensity / incident light intensity. As shown in these 14th plaques and 15th drawings, the transmittance of the liquid crystal display element varies with the value of ΔηίΙ, and K is changed in a manner that has a maximum value. When the liquid crystal layer has a maximum value that indicates the transmittance, The value of And also increases its contrast. The liquid crystal display element of this pickled example uses the value of And as the maximum value of the anti-family shown in Fig. 15 as AndO, and the value of Δη (Π of the above-mentioned filter area a and the above-mentioned non-filter area The value of ^^ 2 of b is set such that And1 is smaller than the optimal ΔηM described above, and And2 is larger than the optimal Δη described above. &lt; 10. For example, when the optimal condition is 527 ~ 528nm, the value of And1 with filter area a is approximately 432na, and the value of And with upper filter area b is approximately 558nin. Fig. 16 shows that in the crystal display element of this embodiment, the color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B are removed and the influence on the absorption wavelength region is used, and only the spectral transmittance distribution of the liquid crystal layer is used. That is, it means that the color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B used in the liquid crystal display element of this embodiment are replaced with a colorless filter that does not have an absorption wavelength region. When the values of Andl and Atid2 are set to Δ ndO ( 527 to 528na) with Α η &lt; Π &lt; Δ ndO &lt; Mnd of And2 is the distribution of the spectral transmittance of the filter region a and the filterless region b. The above values of Audi and Δη (! 2 are Andl = 432nm, Δnd2 = 558nnt, the thickness of the liquid crystal layer dl with the filter region a and the liquid crystal layer d2 without the filter region b and the refractive index anisotropy of the liquid crystal Δη Set ίΠ = 4 · 8ϋ », d2 = 6.2i / in, ^^ = 0.09, and set the area ratio of the filter area a to 70 χ of the area of the pixel area A. &quot; 3 9 -(谙 Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (2IOX 297 mm) 440741 Employees' cooperation cooperation with Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed A7 B7 5. Description of invention (Points) According to FIG. 16, set the Andl and And of the filter area a and the filterless plaque area b to have AndK Δ ndO for the above optimal ΛηίΙΟ value. The hypothesis of And2 is used to offset the wavelength region of the plaque domain a and the wavelength region of the plaque domain b. The value of the wavelength region of the region a is shifted from the value to a smaller one. A peak appears in the spectral transmittance distribution of the filter region a, and a wavelength region of the region b shifts from the value of ZindO toward a larger value by Δηάΐ, and a peak appears in the spectral transmittance distribution of the filterless region b. The spectral distribution curve of the filter region a has sharp peaks in the short wavelength region of the visible light wavelength region, and decreases the transmittance in the long wavelength region. On the other hand, the spectral distribution curve of the filterless region b has sharp peaks in the long wavelength region of the visible light wavelength region, and decreases the transmittance in the short wavelength region. In a pixel plaque field, because the spectral transmittance distributions of the two parties are synthesized and observed, the 2 痼 spectral transmittance components are mutually compensated to make the spectral transmittance distribution of the visible light wavelength region flat, and not caused by the liquid crystal layer. By generating colored light transmitted, a display element with high color purity can be obtained. FIG. 17 shows the combined spectral transmittance distribution of the above-mentioned liquid crystal display element with and without the filter area a and the filter area b of the liquid crystal display element as a solid line. The comparative example 1 is also shown in the figure. REF, 1 &gt; and 2 (REF, 2) 0 Δ ndl and ^ 11 (the values of 12 are Δ ndl = 528 nm (approximately equal to △ “0 &gt;, ^ 11012 = 6821111, the value of Δη of the liquid crystal) in Comparative Example 1 Δπ = 0.11. The values of Δ ndl and Δ nd2 of Comparative Example 2 are A nd2 = 527nie (approximately -4 0-(please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 Specification (2) 0 X 297 mm 44074 1 A7 B7 Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives ^ V. Description of the Invention (Clever) Equal to △ nd 0), A nd 1 = 4 0 8 nb, the value of Δ η of the liquid crystal is Δ η = 0. 0 8 5. In these Comparative Examples 1 and 2, the ratios of the liquid crystal layer thicknesses d1 and d2 to the regions with a spacer and a ring element are respectively Is set to (Π = 4.8 / ί B, d2 = 6.2ua, and 70 *. According to Fig. 17, the composite spectral transmittance distribution characteristics of the liquid crystal display element of this embodiment As shown by the buttercup line, the entire area covering the wavelength range of visible light becomes substantially flat, and there is no banding of transmitted light. In contrast, the composite spectral transmittance distribution characteristics of the comparative example and the line of the graph in the figure It is shown that the transmittance of light in the wavelength region of about 500 to 600 nB is the highest, and the transmittance of the short-wavelength and long-wavelength sides is low, so the transmitted light becomes green-colored light. In addition, the synthesis of Comparative Example 2 The spectral transmittance distribution characteristics are shown by the dashed line in the figure, the transmittance on the short wavelength side becomes lower, and the transmittance on the long wavelength side becomes higher. Therefore, the transmitted light becomes yellow colored light. Therefore, as in this implementation, As shown in the liquid crystal display element of the example, because the red, green, and M color annihilators 15I ?, 15G, and 15B are provided, taking into account the optical effects of these color filters, the above-mentioned filtering through each of the element regions A is filtered. The combination of the light from the liquid crystal calendar in the two regions of the filter region a and the filterless region b becomes white, so that in each pixel region A, the colored light of each color filter is not affected by the liquid crystal layer. Confuses coloring, so each The color purity of the circle element becomes higher, and a bright-colored display element can be obtained. In addition, the transmittance of the liquid crystal display element in an electric field-free state changes according to the value of And as shown in the 14th plaque, and the light transmittance becomes the largest And There are multiple values. The above value of Δγ ^ Ο is best selected when considering anti-4 1-(谙 Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page} This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification ( 210 × 297 public address> 440741 A7 When the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed B7 V. Invention Description (#) lining and response characteristics, the peak of the transmission rate that originally appeared at And became larger, or the second peak The value of △ nd corresponding to the spike. In addition, in order to prevent the difference in thickness of the liquid crystal layer from occurring between the filter-containing region a and the filter-free region b, the color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B formed on the inner surface of the substrate 1 as shown in the second circle The resulting uneven surface shape can be used to make it flat by covering the protective film 17 thereon. In addition, in the first embodiment of the upper case, the orientation processing of a pair of substrates facing each other is on the inner surface of the substrates 1 and 2 on the surface and back, that is, on each pixel unit 3 and the facing electrode. Above 18, the gold body covering the display area is provided with orientation films 14, 19 made of polyimide, etc., and on these orientation films 14, 19, the film surface is rubbed in a specified direction to apply orientation processing. A nematic liquid crystal layer LC is provided between the two substrates 1,2, and the above-mentioned liquid crystal molecules use orientation films 14, 19 provided on the inner surfaces of the two substrates 1,2 to limit the orientation of the substrates 1,2 near them. Direction, torsion orientation is performed between the two base plates 1, 2 at a twist angle of approximately 90 °. In addition, the polarizing plate is configured such that the surface mist polarizing plate 21 on the front surface of the inverted substrate 1 and the back polarizing plate 22 on the rear surface of the inverted substrate 2 are orthogonal to each other with their absorption axes orthogonally aligned by a liquid crystal layer. This state is regarded as the normal white display state of bright display. The orientation state and the configuration of the polarizing plate are shown in detail in Fig. 18. Fig. 18 is an oblique view of the liquid crystal display element of this embodiment. In FIG. 18, arrows la, 2a indicate the orientation directions of the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the substrates 1,2. In addition, in this liquid crystal display element 30, the molecules of the liquid crystal of the above-mentioned liquid crystal cell 31-4 2-(please read the precautions on the back side before filling this page) ) This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2t × 297mm) 440741 A7 B7 Ministry of Standards and Standards Bureau, K-Consumer Hezhu Printing Co., Ltd. 5. Description of the invention (4 '! 1 Orientation t The orientation direction is to the horizontal side 1 when viewed from the side of the surface substrate 1. I | direction (楢 axis X) is larger in the angle range of 0 ° and less than 45 ° »1 1 and the above two substrates 2 When looking towards the front side substrate 1, the front side of the white component is Μ 诮 1, turn right to about 9C 1 ° torsion angle. Read-read 1 back 1 Orientation direction of the liquid crystal molecules near the back side substrate 2 3 Setting surface One of ί is based on the incident light (effectively incident light)角 * The incident light is reflected from the liquid crystal gold 1 I crystal display element 30. X. The oblique projection 1 is reflected by the reflecting plate 23 »Then the Ψ term is emitted and the 1 1 is reflected to the light of the above-mentioned illuminated surface. The strongest emitted light on the side of the inspector. Fill out this installation. In this embodiment * When the page is shot from the upper edge of the m display surface for effective observation. 1 I The incident angle of the incoming light (the vertical direction to the display surface). When the angle formed) is 1 1 I 30 〇 * Use to set the orientation direction of liquid crystal molecules 2a near the back 1 1 side substrate 2 of the liquid crystal cell 31 in the following direction. As shown in the figure, the orientation direction of the liquid crystal molecules near the liquid crystal cell 31 on the rear side of the substrate 2 is close to the horizontal direction of the horizontal 1 direction (horizontal sleeve X) when viewed from the base of the foot. 1 In addition, in this example of pickling *, back the two substrates as described above 2 Near 1 1 Orientation direction 2 a of liquid crystal molecules, set the orientation direction 13 of liquid crystal molecules near 1 of the front side substrate 1 of the liquid crystal cell 31 to 1 I The orientation direction 2 a when turning left about 90 The shifting direction of 〇 is 9 when viewed from the front of element 1 1 and turns left to the above-mentioned horizontal axis X by about 11 5. (25 〇 + 90 °) 1 | Offset direction 〇 In addition, t Liquid crystal molecules M Near the orientation of the back substrate 2 1 I direction 2a as a reference, when the above-mentioned back substrate 2 faces the front substrate 1 1 1 When looking forward, M turns right and twists at a large twist angle of 90 °, and twists 1 1 to 0 1 i 43 &lt; 1 1 i 1 This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (2 lOx 297 cm) r 4 ^ 〇7 41 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention v) 1 1 In addition »In this example, the above-mentioned reflecting plate 23 is configured to obtain 1 1 | The high reflectance in the vertical direction makes the incident direction approximately parallel to the vertical direction of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 1 1 display element 30 (Longitudinal sleeve Y), you can effectively reverse the reading of the reading surface i above the effective surface of the incident direction of the incident light, i.e., reading the back i incident light * and project it to the front direction of the display surface. 0 [ 1 In addition * In the above-mentioned liquid crystal display element 30 »Because the liquid crystal cell pays attention to the weight 1 I 31 The molecules of the liquid crystal are oriented on the back surface 2 The horizontal sleeve X of the display surface is again the contention term 1 from the front of the element Look at the left and right angles of about 25 ° * &1; 1 Orientation direction fill in this package I 2 a as a reference »For the liquid crystal molecules 1 Μ from the back side substrate 2 toward the page ..., 1 1 Table if the substrate 1 self element 刖Turn to the right and twist at a twist angle of about 90 °. 1 1 1 Turn to orientation 9 Even when the reflective TN liquid crystal display element is used, 1 1 can be viewed from the above normal viewing directions &gt; i Order 1 Fully contrasted »With sufficient brightness In addition, the viewing angle of the liquid crystal display element 30 of the above-mentioned example is that the direction of rotation is about 70 ° when viewed from the front of the element 1, but the direction can also be 1 Μ Yes When viewed from the direction of the vertical display surface, it becomes the display surface obliquely to the lower right 1 [Direction »The direction of the viewing angle is only from the usual observation direction 1 when it is near this (that is, a little bit than the direction perpendicular to the display surface) 1 I toward the lower edge of the display surface) The contrast of the display is not inferior when compared with a conventional liquid crystal display element with a viewing angle of 1 ί directly below the display surface. 1 i can ensure sufficient Therefore, the orientation state of the liquid crystal molecules 1 1 of the liquid crystal cell 31 of the liquid crystal display element 30 described above can be designed so that the effective angle t I of the incident light from the diagonally above the display surface is set at 20 a Any angle within the range of 30 0 1 1 44 1,. 1 t This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X 297 mm) 44074 1 A7 B7 Offical Consumer Cooperatives, Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Seal ^ V. Description of the invention 1 1 ° 〇I 1 In addition * Circle 19 is an oblique view 9 is used to indicate another example of pickling II 〇 The example of Figure 1 is to shoot people from obliquely above to the surface side 1 * 1, the angle of incidence of the effective incident light in the reflected light of the first light is 2C) ° 〇 In reading * I read 1 I The observer observes that the angle of effective incident light is 2C) ° In this embodiment, the back surface 1 | 1 of the crystal display element 3C, the middle side of the liquid crystal cell 31 on the back side of the substrate 2 Note 1 The orientation direction of the liquid crystal molecules 2a Μ Set the direction in the following manner. 1 ie * as shown in Figure 19 »Fill in the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules near the back of the LCD unit 31 on the back side of the substrate 2 2 a Horizontal page 1 1 (horizontal axis) when viewed from the front of the element X) Turning around 10. Offset direction 1 1 In addition »In this embodiment» According to the near side of the back substrate 2 described above! 1 Orientation direction of the liquid crystal molecules 2a Set the I direction of the front substrate 1 of the liquid crystal cell 31 near the orientation direction of the liquid crystal molecules 1a The setting is such that when viewed from the front of the element, 1 shifts to the orientation direction 2a to the left by about 90 °, that is,%. When viewed from the front of the element, it turns to the horizontal direction (the horizontal axis 50 turns to the left by about 100 〇 (10. 90 〇), the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules K on the back side of the substrate 2 1 1 direction 28 as the reference% When looking from the above two substrates 2 toward the front side substrate 1 1 when viewed from the front of the element, turn right by about 90 〇 The twist angle is determined by twisting 1 J to 〇1 1 and t. In these embodiments, 1I reflected light from the obliquely above the display surface is observed by the observer in the reflected light. The angle of incidence becomes 20. 1 Example of 1 »Because the effective incident light is -1 on the display surface in the normal case 1 1 vertical direction W angle of about 20 0 to about 30 0 angle of incidence The light in the direction of the upper edge of the above display surface is 1 45 1 Ί '1 in this embodiment. This paper size applies the National Standard for Ten Countries (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm) 44 074 1 A7 B7 Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Bureau's Consumer Cooperative

五、發明説明 (枓) 1 1 定 向 狀 態 之 範 圍 内 可 Μ 任 意 選 擇 〇 1 1 該 定 向 狀 態 是 使 背 側 基 板 2 之 近 傍 之 液 晶 分 子 之 定 向 1 1 方 向 2a 成 為 從 元 件 前 方 看 時 對 顯 示 面 之 横 粬 X 左 轉 大 約 請 1 先 1 1C 大 約 25 ϋ 之 角 度 範 圍 内 之 方 向 I 該 定 向 方 向 2a 閱1 讀 1 作 為 基 準 * 液 晶 分 子 之 狀 態 是 從 背 側 基 板 2 朝 向 表 脚 基 背 面 I 1 之 1 板 1 當 自 元 件 前 方 看 時 Μ 右 轉 大 致 90 〇 之 扭 轉 角 進 行 扭 注 意 1 事 1 轉 定 向 〇 項 再 1 另 外 * 上 述 之 定 向 狀 態 是 更 佳 之 實 施 » 該 兩 涸 基 板 1,2 填 % 本 裝 1 之 近 傍 之 定 向 方 向 1 a ,2 a即使偏移5 □ 左 右 時 &gt; 亦 可 以 獲 頁 '«•W· 1 I 得 與 上 述 第 1 和 第 2 實 腌 例 相 同 程 度 之 效 果 負 所 以 液 晶 ) 1 分 子 之 定 向 狀 態 可 K 使 背 側 基 板 2 之 近 傍 之 定 向 方 向 2a 1 1 成 為 從 元 件 前 方 看 時 對 顯 示 面 之 水 平 方 向 (横袖X)左轉 ! 訂 5 ° -30。 之角度範圍內之方向 ) 1 另 外 1 液 晶 分 子 之 定 向 狀 態 亦 可 K 使 背 側 基 板 2 之 近 1 傍 之 定 向 方 向 2a成 為 從 元 件 前 方 看 時 對 顯 示 面 之 水 平 方 I (横轴X)左轉大於0 〇 小 於 45 D 之 角 度 範 匾 内 之 方 向 0 I 1 假 如 將 液 晶 分 子 之 定 向 狀 態 設 定 在 此 範 圍 内 時 對 於 1 從 通 常 之 覼 察 方 向 覼 察 到 之 顯 示 * 可 Μ 確 保 具 有 充 分 之 1 1 反 襯 f 當 與 習 知 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 比 較 時 可 具 有 充 分 之 1 1 亮 度 〇 1 J [第2 實 施 例 1 1 1 第 20 圖 第 22圄 表 示 本 發 明 之 第 2 實 施 例 0 另 外 » 對 1 1 於 與 第 1 實 施 例 相 同 之 構 成 元 件 其 說 明 在 此 加 省 略 0 i I 第 20 圔 是 用 Μ 表 示 第 2 實 施 例 之 ΓΒΤΙ 睡1 素 和 彩 色 過 m 器 之 1 I -46 - .1 I 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 440741 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明 (仏) 1 配 置 之 平 面 fBl 圖 〇 在 第 20圈 中 上 述 之 各 色 之 彩 色 過 m 器 1 1 I 15R , 1 5G , 15B分別被設在各個圖素區域A,對應到圖素區 1 ! 域 A 之 横 寬 方 向 之 中 央 部 , 而 且 在 畫 面 之 左 右 方 並 排 % 請 1 先 1 之 各 色 之 彩 色 過 m 器 15R , 15G , 15B被設置成每- -個不同 1 背 1 色 之 彩 色 過 m 器 之 位 置 在 圔 素 區 域 A 之 晝 面 之 上 下 方 向 i 之 1 互 相 偏 移 〇 意 1 1 事 1 另 外 9 上 述 各 m 圖 素 區 域 A 内 之 彩 色 過 濾 器 15R , 1 5G , 項 再 LA 1 15B之外側之區域形成非著色光射出區域b ,對於從表側 填 寫 本 裝 1 基 板 1 之 前 面 側 射 入 然 後 受 配 置 在 背 俩 基 板 2 之 後 面 側 頁 1 I 之 敗 亂 反 射 板 23反 射 賴 Μ 射 出 到 表 側 基 板 1 之 前 面 側 之 1 I 1 光 » 使 其 未 著 色 的 透 過 〇 1 1 另 外 » 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 是 如 上 所 示 之 用 Μ 進 行 正 常 白 1 訂 椹 態 之 顯 示 者 在 相 鄰 之 圈 素 區 域 A 之 間 之 區 域 » 亦 即 1 在 液 晶 分 子 經 常 被 定 向 成 初 期 之 扭 轉 定 向 狀 態 之 未 施 加 1 窜 場 之 區 域 , 形 成 亮 顯 示 區 域 V , 來 白 表 側 基 板 1 之 前 面 j 側 之 射 入 光 f 被 敗 亂 反 射 板 23或 閘 極 線 1 0或 資 料 線 11 和 1 1 電 容 形 成 電 極 12反 射 , 藉 Μ 射 出 到 表 側 基 板 1 之 » r. 刖 面 側0 Γ 亦 印 f 因 為 被 設 在 上 述 背 側 基 板 2 之 内 面 之 閘 極 線 10 1 | 和 資 料 媒 11 通 過 上 述 之 亮 顯 示 區 域 U 内 和 霄 容 形 成 電 1 1 極 12亦 横 切 上 述 之 亮 顯 示 區 域 W, 所 Μ 從 \ 刖 面 側 射 入 到 亮 1 I 顧 示 區 域 V 之 光 之 中 , 射 入 到 通 過 閘 極 線 1 0和 資 料 線 11 1 I 和 電 容 形 成 電 掻 12之 部 份 之 光 % 不 會 射 入 到 反 射 板 23 i 1 I 因 為 上 述 之 閘 極 線 1 0和 資 料 線 11 和 電 容 形 成 電 極 12M 高 1 1 反 射 率 之 金 臑 膜 形 成 * 所 Μ 射 入 到 該 等 部 份 之 光 亦 被 反 * 1 1 I -47- 1 1 Ί 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS &gt; A4規格(2IOX 297公釐) 44074 1 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 射 〇 1 1 | 因 此 9 本 液 晶 顯 示 元 伴 是 利 用 外 來 光 用 以 進 行 反射型 1 1 顯 示 者 4 從 表 側 基 板 1 射 入 之 光 透 過 前 m 鴒 極 光 板21變 諳 1 先 1 成 直 線 偏 極 光 t 該 光 順 序 的 透 過 液 晶 層 LC和 後 側 偏極光 閱' 讀 1 I 板 22 , 被 散 亂 反 射 板 23或 閛 極 線 10和 資 科 線 11和 電容形 背 面 1 | 之 1 成 電 極 12反射 &gt; 順 序 的 透 遇 上 述 之 後 側 儇 極 光 板 22和液 注 意 1 事 1 晶 層 LC及 前 m 偏 極 光 板 21後 射 出 到 表 側 基 板 1 m 〇 項 再 另 外 在 上 述 跑 例 之 菝 晶 顯 示 元 件 » 因 為 不 同色之 填 寫 本 裝 各 個 彩 色 過 m 器 其 位 置 被 設 置 成 依 畫 面 之 上 下 方 向互相 頁 •-w· 1 I 偏 移 , 所 Μ 從 晝 面 之 左 右 方 向 射 入 之 光 » 透 過 圈 素區域 1 1 (對應到依畫面之左右方向並排之不同色之彩色過瀘器) 1 ! 中 之 —- 方 之 圖 素 區 域 A 進 行 射 入 9 和 透 過 另 外 —. 方之圖 1 訂 素 區 域 A 進 行 射 出 » 該 光 能 夠 通 過 對 應 到 上 述 之 一方之 1 圖 素 區 域 A 之 彩 色 過 濾 器 和 對 應 到 另 外 一 方 之 圈 素區域A 1 之 不 同 色 之 彩 色 過 濾 器 雙 方 之 櫬 率 變 低 » 因 此 可 以使該 | 等 不 同 色 之 彩 色 過 m 器 15R , 15G , 15Β之吸收光量減少。 1 1 另 外 * 在 上 述 之 實 施 例 中 是 使 各 色 之 彩 色 過 漶 器 15R , ί 15G , 15B之橫寬和縱幅小於圓素區域A 之横寬和縱幅,但 1 | 是也可以使 上 述 彩 色 過 m 器 15R , 15Β之横寬和縱幅之任何 1 1 一 方 與 画 圃 素 區 域 A 之 幅 度 大 致 相 同 0 1 I 其 中 1 最 好 使 上 述 彩 色 過 瀘 器 15R , 1 5G , 1 5 B之横寬小 1 i 於 ΓΟ! 圓 素 區 域 A 之 横 寬 嘗 依 照 埴 棰 方 式 時 * 如 上 述 之寅陁 1 1 例 所 示 t 因 為 匾 素 區 域 A 内 之 彩 色 過 濾 器 之 側 方 之區域 1 Ι 成 為 非 著 色 光 射 出 區 域 b , 所 Μ 透 過 圖 素 區 域 (對應到晝 Ί 48 1 Ί 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 440741 A7 B7 經濟部中央標隼局—工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明(π) 1 面 之 左 右 方 向 並 排 之 不 同 色 之 彩 色 過 m 器 )中之- -方之 I 1 I 匯 素 區 域 A, 射 人 到 另 外 一 方之圈素區域A之光, 能夠通 1 1 過 對 應 到 上 述 之 —^ 方 之 画 素 區 域 A 之 彩 色 過 濾 器 和 對 應 請 1 先 1 到 另 外 方 之 fBW 圖 素 區 域 A 之 不 同 色 之 彩 色 過 m 器 雙 方 之 1 機 率 變 低 , 因 此 可 Μ 使 該 等 不 同 色 之 彩 色 通 m 器 之 吸 收 背 1 I 之 1 I 光 最 減 少 可 Μ 提 高 從 耋 面 之 左 右 方 向 射 入 之 光 之 利 用 1 1 1 效 率 〇 項 再 填 寫 * 1 t 另 外 » 第21圖是平面圖 » 用 來 表 示 本 第 2 實 m 例 之 變 装 化 例 之 圖 素 和 彩 色 過 濾 器 之 排 列 〇 該 圖 素 排 列 是 將 對 應 頁 1 I 到 各 m 圖 素 區 域 A 之 彩色過滅器15R , 15G , 15B分別作畫 1 1 r 面 之 左 右 方 向 分 割 成 2 個 1 在 該 等 被 分 割 之 過 漶 器 之 間 1 1 存 在 有 間 隔 S 以 圈 素 區 域 A 之 各 個 分 割 過 濾 器 之 間 之 1 訂 區 域 作 為 非 著 色 光 射 出 區 域 b , 以該圖素區域A 間之圖 1 素 區 域 A 之 外 周 部 全 部 作 為 亮 顬 示 區 域 W. 在 本 變 化 例 中 ! 被 分 割 之 過 濾 器 分 別 在 顯 示 耋 面 之 m 向 m 成 長 條 彤 狀 1 I &gt; 和 在 媒 1¾ 排 齊 1 而 旦 用 以 射 出 分 割 過 m 器 間 之 未 著 色 1 1 之 光 之 非 著 色 光 射 出 區 域 b 和 亮 顯 示 區 域 V 依 顯 示 晝 面 1 之 上 下 方 向 建 接 的 排 列 〇 在 本 實 m 例 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 1 I 因 為 具 有 沿 著 盡 面 之 上 下 方 向 之 縱 向 長 條 m 吠 之 非 著 1 1 色 光 射 出 區 域 所 Μ 在 利 用 外 來 光 進 行 顯 示 之 情 況 時 &gt; 1 | 可 Μ 顯 示 具 有 充 分 亮 度 之 彩 色 圖 像 〇 1 | 另 外 » 第22圖是平面圖 9 用來表示本第2寅施例之第3 1 1 變 化 例 〇 其 圖 素 排 列 是 將 對 應 到 各 個 聞 圆 素 區 域 A 之 各 個 1 i 之彩色過®器15R , 1 5G , 15B依耋面之上下方向分剌成多 * 1 1 49 1 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2丨0&gt;&lt;297公釐) 4 4 Ο T 4 1 a? B7 五、發明説明(w) 個,藉Μ設置各個圖素區域A内之非著色光射出區域b, 畫面之左右方向並排之各色之彩色過濾器15R,15G,15B 之分割位置依上述畫面之上下方向使不同色之各届彩色 過濾器互栢偏移。 因此,在本第3變化例之液晶顯示元件中,來自盡面 上方之射入光和來自左右方向之射入光均可有效的利用 ,可以顯示在盡面具有充分亮度之彩色圈像。 [第3實狍例] 第23匾是第3實_例之液晶顯示元件之剖面圖。另外 ,其與第1賁腌例相間之構造附加相同之符號,而其說 明則加Μ省略。 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印聚 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 如第23匾所示,在表側基板1之内面,於該等彩色遇 濾器15R,15G,15B之列間和行間,設有反射構件51用來 將來自元件前方之射人光反射向元件前方。該反射構件 51由高反射率之银或鋁系合金等之金鼷膜所製成,彤成 對應到各個_素區域A之列間和行間之區域之全體。另 外,K上述之反射構件51反射該射入到各個圖素區域A 之匾素間區域之外來光。因此,使各個匾素區域A之圖 素間區域變為明亮,可K使畫面全體之亮度變為更高。 [第4實施例] 第24國是第4莨施例之液晶顯示元件之剖面匾。在該 液晶顯示元件中配置有反射構件24用來代替上逑第1實 腌例中之被配置在背側基板2之後面之敗亂反射板23, 該反射構件24用來將透過液晶層LC之射人光反射向對上 -50&quot; 本紙張尺度遒用中國國家標準(CNS &gt; A4規格(2丨OX297公嫠&gt; 4 4 0741 Α7 Β7 五、發明説明(49 ) 述液晶層LC接近垂直之方向,其他之構造與上述之第1 宵腌例相同。 本第4實腌例所使用之反射構件24之構成包含有微稜 鏡25a·,和被設在該微梭鏡25a之背面之白色之鏡面反射 膜 25b。 上述之微稜鏡25a之形成是在玻璃或丙烯酸系樹脂等 之透明板之表面,依一方向密接的平行並排連鑲之微小 幅度之细長稜鏡部,上述之稜鏡部在其一側面為垂直, 在其另一期[面為具有指定之傾斜角之傾斜面,具有直角 三角形之剖面形狀。 另外,上述之微梭鏡25a之各個稜鏡部之幅度最好是 使1假稜鏡部對應到1個圃素電極列,或是使1個稜鏡 部對應到2〜3列之多個圖素區域之列。 另外,上述之反射構件24是將其微稜鏡25a之各個稜 鏑部之傾斜面設置成朝向外來光之主射入方向t當與晝 面之斜上方,亦即垂直於顯示元件前面之方向比較時, Μ具有較多外來光來自傾向晝面上緣側方向之方式,適 當的選擇上述梭鏡部之傾斜面之方向。 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 依照本第4實施例之液晶顯示元件時,因為射入光依 圖中之虚線箭頭所示的被反射構件24反射向對液晶層LC 接近垂直之方向,所Μ透遇圖素區域Α之周緣部之射入 光,其透過相鄰之其他圖素區域A進行射出之櫬率可以 變為更少,因此,射人光不會被彩色過滤器吸收,經由 使射出光量變多用來使顯示變亮,可Μ顯示高品質之彩 -51 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(2丨0X297公嫠) 44 074 t A7 B7 經濟部中央標隼局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明 1 色 圖 像 〇 1 1 I 另 外 9 依 照 本 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 時 因 為 射 人 光 被 上 述 之 ! 1 反 射 構 件 24反 射 向 對 液 晶 層 LC接 近 垂 直 之 方 向 9 所 以 朝 請 1 先 1 向 正 面 (亦卽垂直元件前面之方向) 之 射 出 光 量 變 多 &gt; 可 閲 讀. 1 背 1 提 高 顯 示 之 正 面 之 亮 度 〇 I 之 1 I [第5 莨施例] 注 意 古 1 1 第 25圖 是 剖 面 鼷 用 來 表 示 本 發 明 之 第 5 實 施 例 之 液 爭 項 再 1 [ 晶 顯 示 元 件 〇 另 外 » 其 與 第 1 實 施 例 相 同 之 構 造 附 加 相 填 寫 本 装 1 同 之 符 號 * 而 其 說 明 則 加 &gt;Λ 省 略 〇 頁 'w· 1 | 在 第 25圈 中 t 在 表 側 基 板 1 之 内 面 設 有 紅 » 錄 1 藍 之 1 1 1 3 色 之 彩 色 過 m 器 1 5R , 15G,1 5Β » 分 別 對 應 到 背 側 基 板 2 1 1 之 各 個 圖 素 電 極 3 , 和 依 列 方 向 和 行 方 向 交 替 的 並 排 ,和 I 訂 設 有 側 面 反 射 構 件 52分 別 對 應 到 被 設 在 上 述 背 側 基 板 2 1 之 TPT4 和 閘 極 線 10 , 資 料 線 11 和 電 容 形 成 電 極 12 « 在 形 丨 成 覆 Μ 該 等 之 透 明 之 保 護 膜 (絕緣膜) 17 之 上 « 該 有 至 少 1 '1 為 1 個 之 透 明 之 面 對 電 極 18 % 面 對 上 述 之 圜 素 電 極 3 之 1 1 全 部 * 利 用 與 該 等 iicH 圖 素 電 極 3 面 對 之 部 分 用 來 形 成 圖 素 1 區 域 A , 然 後 在 面 對 電 極 1 8上 彤 成 定 向 膜 19 〇 1 | 另 外 * 上 述 之 側 面 反 射 構 件 52之 形 成 是 使 氧 化 鉻 膜 等 1 之 低 反 射 率 膜 52b和鉻膜等之高反射率金屬膜52a m 序 的 1 | 積 層 在 表 側 基 板 1 之 内 面 &gt; 然 後 利 用 影 印 法 進 行 IBH IM 型 製 1 | 作 對 應 到 該 TFT4 之 部 份 形 成 覆 蓋 在 上 述 TFT4 之 大 致 1 I 全 體 對 應 到 閘 極 媒 10 » 資 料 線 11 » 和 電 容 形 成 電 掻 12 I I 之 部 份 1 分 別 形 成 連 續 之 線 吠 , 具 有 對 應 之 m 10 ,11和 1 I -52- 1 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2丨OX 297公釐} A707 4 t_B7五、發明説明(ri ) 媒 之 應 對 著 沿 是 或 度 幅 之 下 Μ 度 幅 之 2 極 電 成 形 容 電 彤 容 電 和 狀 點 成 形 2 11 極 11 隔 間 之 間 之 A 域 區 素 圖 之 邸 '—1(成 成 相 ί媒(ίι形 極度 閘幅 ,之 外域 另區 間 極 電 成 形 容 電 和 素資 圖 , 比狭 成稍 形— 度 幅 之 上線之 ,1 1_ *極 1 多閘媒 很於料 狭小資 度成之 幅定细 之設最 域被之 區度中 間幅12 素之極 圖部電 述狀成 上線形 比之容 2 ί 5 電 件和 度構11 幅射媒 之反料 11面資。 矂側 .度 料述10幅 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 亦即,在本實施例中,上述之圖素間區域之幅度為大 約1 0 « m ,上逑資料線11之幅度為大約6wm,上述側面反 射構件52之線狀部之幅度為6u mK下。 上述之钢面反射構件52利用上述之高反射率金靨5 2a 以側面反射從元件前方射人被後面側之反射板23反射藉 以射出到元件前方之光,用來改變其射出方向,對應到 該側面反射構件52之圖素間區域之部份,亦即對應到 TFT4和閘極線10及資料線11之部份,包圍各個圖素區域 A之全周,和對應到雷容形成電極12之部份,依盡面之 左右方向(水平方向)横切各画圖素區域A之非著色光射 出區域b之一部份(亦即圖素區域A之上緣側之非著色 光射出區域b)。 在該圖素區域,對應到被設在前側基板1之内面之側 面反射構件52之閘極線10,資料線11之部份形成互相面 對,因此,圖素區域之實際之射出面積比上述之側面反 射構件52小該面對面積之部份,如上所述,因為匾素區 I I— i - I―—1 ^^1. I -- - - II n 1 - I ^^1 - -- -- - ― n I I (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度遙用中國國家橾準(CNS ) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 44074 1 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印繁 五、發明説明 (^ ) 1 域 之 幅 度 為 大 約 1 0 u n 側面反射梅件5 2之幅度為6 W m 1 1 I 以 下 * 所 以 匾 素 間 區 域 之 射 出 面 積 之 減 小 極 少 〇 1 1 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 因 為 設 有 上 述 之 側 面 反 射 構 件 八· 請 1 先 1 5; , 所 以 在 從 元 件 -U&gt; 刖 方 射 入 &gt; 被 後 面 側 之 反 射 板 23反 射 閱. 讀 1 1 藉 以 射 出 到 元 件 前 方 之 光 之 中 * 來 白 上 述 圖 素 間 區 域 和 背 © 1 I 之 1 圖 素 區 域 A 之 非 著 色 區 域 b之- 一部f 分區域之射出光, 如 第 注 意 1 事 1 25圈 之 箭 頭 m 所 示 9 被 爾 面 反 射 構 件 52 之 側 面 反 射 因 而 項 再 ! 變 化 方 向 * 其 散 亂 反 射 光 之 射 出 是 彤 成 使 正 面 方 向 (接 填 寫 本 装 1 近 垂 直 於 畫 面 方 向 之 方 向 )之射出光量變多之亮度分布 頁 S_«· 1 I 之 光 0 1 1 另 外 t 射 入 到 鄰 接 之 圖 素 區 域 A 之 間 之 ίρ&gt;1 ΗΒΙ 素 間 區 域 之 1 ! 光 被 反 射 成 非 著 色 光 (白色光) 藉 &gt;λ 射 出 到 元 件 前 方 〇 在 1 訂 該 圈 素 間 區 域 射 出 之 非 著 色 光 因 為 上 述 圖 素 間 區 域 之 液 1 晶 分 子 經 常 為 初 期 之 扭 轉 定 向 狀 態 » 所 Μ 經 常 為 高 強 度 1 之 光 〇 | 另 外 在 該 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 * 因 為 分 别 對 應 到 各 個 圖 1 1 素 區 域 A 之 彩 色 過 m 器 15R , 1 5G , 15Β之面積形成小於圖素 丨 區 域 A 之 面 積 所 Μ 不 僅 是 各 個 ist 圈 素 區 域 A 之 未 對 應 到 1 1 彩 色 過 m 器 之 非 著 色 光 射 出 區 域 b , 而 且 上 述 之 圖 素 間 區 1 1 域 部 形 成 不 會 著 色 之 透 過 區 域 1 使 從 元 件 刖 方 射 人 &gt; 被 1 | 反 射 板 23或 閘 極 * 資 料 線 10 ,1 1或電容形成用電槿12反 1 r 射 藉 Η 射 出 到 元 件 上 刖 方 之 光 • 不 會 著 色 的 透 過 因 此 , 1 1 被 上 述 側 面 反 射 構 件 52 之 側 面 反 射 朝 向 正 面 方 向 之 射 出 I I 光 量 變 多 赘 肜 成 亮 度 分 布 之 光 的 進 行 射 出 » 成 為 高 亮 度 1 I 1 54 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2丨0 X 297公嫠) 4407 4 1 at B7 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印裂 五、發明説明(㈠) 1 之 非 著 色 光 * 所 Μ 可 以 提 高 從 正 面 方 向 觀 察 到 之 畫 面 之 1 1 I 亮 度 〇 1 1 另 外 9 在 上 逑 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 件 中 * 因 為 從 外 來 光 之 主 請 1 先 1 射 入 方 向 之 晝 面 之 斜 上 方 射 入 t 然 後 被 反射板23等反射 I-'-* 讀 1 背 之 光 * 有 效 的 射 入 到 横 方 向 之 側 面 反 射 構 件5 2之側面 ( T&amp; 之 1 對 應 到 圖 素 間 區 域 中 之 沿 著 畫 面 之 左 右 方 向 之 區 域 ). 和 .意 1 I 事 1 射入到側面反射樽件52之俩面 (對應到圖素區域A之非著 項 再 1 填 色 光 射 出 區 域 b 之 部 份 * 被 設 置 成 横 切 晝 面 之 左 右 方 寫 本 装 \ 向 之 方 式 ), 因此, 該等之側面反射構件52之側面之光 % f I 之 反 射 量 變 多 , 可 Η 有 效 的 提 高 正 面 亮 度 〇 1 1 I [第6 實施例] 1 I 第26匾是平面 圄 1 用 來 表 示 第 6 實 施 例 之 液 晶 顯 示 元 1 訂 件 之 fBH 画 素 和 彩 色 遇 濾 器 之 排 列 〇 另 外 其 與 上 述 各 個 實 1 施 例 相 同 之 構 造 附 加 相 同 之 符 號 » 而 其 說 明 則 加 Μ 省 略。 1 在第26圄 中 I 在 國 素 區 域 A 之 周 緣 部 配 置 有 彩 色 遇 m » J 器 15R , 1 5G , 15B , 在 圖 素 區 域 之 中 央 部 形 成 有 非 著 色 光 射 I 1 出 區 域 b c 在第1 實施例之如第2 圖所示之Μ圖素區域A 之 周 緣 部 作 為 非 著 色 光 射 出 區 域 b 之 情 況 » 經 由 使 貼 合 1 I 表 側 基 板 1 和 背 側 基 板 2 之 位 置 產 生 偏 移 * 用 來 變 化 圖 1 1 素 區 域 之 周 緣 部 » 與 背 側 基 板 2 上 之 配 線 材 料 9 和 表 側 1 I 基 板 1 上 之 黑 罩 幕 或 彩 色 過 m 器 之 相 對 位 置 » 藉 Μ 變 化 1 | 非 著 色 光 發 射 出 區 域 b 之 面 積 〇 1 I 匾 素 區 域 A 之 亮 度 在 每 一 個 顯 示 元 件 會 有 變 動 〇 與 此 1 I 相 對 的 * 依 照 本 第 6 實 施 例 時 • 因 為 以 iErt _ 素 區 域 A 之 中 - 1 I 55 1 1 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家捸準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) A 1 ^ A7 B7 五、發明説明(女4 ) 央部作為非著色光射出區域周緣部作為著色光射出 匾域,所Μ利用上述之位置偏移所變化者是著色光射出 匾域而不是高亮度之非著色光射出匾域t&gt;,所以可以減小 每一個顯示元件之亮度之變動。 [第7實施例] 第27圃表示第7實胞例之液晶顯示元件之剖面圖。另 外,其與上述各個實施例相同之携造附加相同之符號, 而其說明刖加K省略。 在第27圖中,將非著色光射出區域b E置在圖素區域 A之中央部,和由透明導電膜形成之各饀圖素電極3之 形成是Μ金靨等製成之導電性反射膜3b覆蓋在對應到非 著色光射出區域b之區域,未被反射膜3b覆蓋之圖素電 極3之區域用來形成光透過區域3a,在圖素區域A内只 使從背側基板2透過表側基板1之光成為著色光。 依照本第7實施例之液晶顧示元件時,射入到表側基 板1之外來光透遇非著色光射出區域b和著色光射出區 域a的其中之一,被反射膜3b或設在背倒基板2之後面 之反射板23反射,藉Μ射出到元件前方。 經濟部中央標隼局員工消費合作社印製 (請先吣讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 另外,反射瞑3b之形成區域可Μ具有與非著色射出區 域b相同之面積,最好是具有稍大之面積,在這種情況 時,從背側基板2照射在表側基板1之透過光可以利用 反射膜3b更確實的遮光。另外,圖素電極3之反射膜3b 是配置在液晶層LC側之層,但是也可Μ是配置在基板2 側之層。 -56- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家楼準(CNS ) Α4規格(210 X 297公釐) 440741 A7 B7 五、發明説明(β ) 另外,在第7實施例中亦可以在背側基板2之後面使 用半透過反射板26,用來代替敗亂反射板23等之反射構 件。在這種情況時,從背側基板2之後面照射背面光( 圖中未顯示)等之照明光,在透遇該半透過反射板26後, 只透過著色光射出區域a,在非著色光射出區域b由於有 上述之導電性反射膜3b而不能透過。因此,不會使反襯 降低,可以形成透過型和反射型兩對應之顯示元件。 另外,在本發明之液晶顯示元件中,亦可Μ不使用反 射板,形成透過型之液晶顯示元件,在這種情況時亦可 Κ猜得明亮之彩色圖像之顯示。 n —^1 -- - - -II 1. - -1 ^^1 - (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 -57- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公釐)V. Description of the invention (枓) 1 1 can be arbitrarily selected within the range of the orientation state 0 1 1 The orientation state is to make the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules near the back substrate 2 1 1 direction 2a becomes the display surface when viewed from the front of the element The horizontal direction X turns left about 1 please 1 first 1 1C direction of about 25 degrees of angle I the orientation direction 2a read 1 read 1 as a reference * the state of the liquid crystal molecules is from the back substrate 2 to the back of the foot base I 1 No. 1 Board 1 When viewed from the front of the component, M turns to the right by a twist angle of approximately 90 °. Attention 1 thing 1 turns the orientation 0 items and then 1 In addition * the above orientation is a better implementation »The two substrates 1,2 % The orientation direction of the near side of this equipment 1 is 1 a, 2 a. Even if it is shifted by 5 □ or so &gt; you can get the page '«• W · 1 I The effect is the same as that of the second example, so the liquid crystal) 1 The orientation state of the molecules can be K to make the orientation direction 2a 1 1 of the back side substrate 2 close to the horizontal direction of the display surface when viewed from the front of the element (cross sleeve X ) Turn left! Order 5 ° -30. Orientation within the angular range) 1 In addition, the orientation state of the liquid crystal molecules can also be K. The orientation direction 2a of the near side 2 of the back substrate 2 becomes the horizontal side I (horizontal axis X) of the display surface when viewed from the front of the element Turn the direction within the angle plaque of greater than 0 〇 less than 45 D 0 I 1 If the orientation state of the liquid crystal molecules is set within this range, the display of 1 from the usual observation direction is displayed * 1 can be ensured to have sufficient 1 1 Contrast f can have sufficient brightness when compared with a conventional liquid crystal display element 1 1 brightness 0 1 J [Second Embodiment 1 1 1 20th Figure 22] shows a second embodiment of the present invention 0 In addition »pair 1 1 The description of the same constituent elements as in the first embodiment is omitted here. 0 i I 20th is the ΓΒΤ1 sleep 2 element and the color filter 1 I -46- .1 I This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm) 440741 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (仏) The color passers 1 1 I 15R, 1 5G, and 15B of the above-mentioned colors in each of the 20 circles are respectively set in each pixel region A, corresponding to the central portion of the pixel region 1 in the width direction of the region A, and in the screen The left and right sides are side-by-side%. Please set the color filters 15R, 15G, and 15B of each of the first and first colors to 15-, 15-, and 15B. The direction i of 1 is offset from each other. 0 means 1 1 thing 1 and other 9. The color filters 15R, 15G, and LA 1 15B in the m pixel area A above each form an uncolored light exit area b. For Fill from the side Copybook 1 Board 1 is incident on the front side and then is placed on the back side 2 of the substrate 2. The reflection plate 23 on the front side 1 is reflected by the reflection plate 23 and emitted to the front side 1 of the front side 1 I 1 light » Colored transmission 〇1 1 In addition »The liquid crystal display element is a normal white 1 using M as shown above. The display is in the region between the adjacent pixel regions A. That is, 1 is often used in liquid crystal molecules. Oriented to the initial twisted orientation. The area where no channel shift is applied to form a bright display area V. The incident light f on the front side j of the front side substrate 1 is falsified by the reflective plate 23 or gate line 10 or data. Lines 11 and 1 1 are reflected by the capacitor-forming electrode 12 and are emitted to the surface side substrate 1 through r. R. The surface side 0 Γ is also printed because the gate line 10 1 provided on the inside surface of the back side substrate 2 and the information11 Through the above-mentioned bright display area U and Xiao Rong to form electricity 1 1 pole 12 also crosses the above-mentioned bright display area W, so M enters into the light of the bright 1 I watch area V from The light% incident on the part that forms the capacitor 12 through the gate line 10 and the data line 11 1 and the capacitor will not be incident on the reflective plate 23 i 1 I because the above-mentioned gate line 10 and the data line 11 And capacitor forming electrode 12M gold 1 1 high reflectance film formation * All light incident on these parts is also reflected * 1 1 I -47- 1 1 Ί 1 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS &gt; A4 specification (2IOX 297 mm) 44074 1 A7 B7 Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention () 1 1 Shooting 01 1 | Therefore 9 LCD elements are used for external light For reflection type 1 1 Display 4 The light incident from the front substrate 1 passes through the front m鸰 The aurora plate 21 becomes 谙 1, and then it becomes a linear polarized light. The light passes through the liquid crystal layer LC and the rear polarized light in sequence. Read 1 I plate 22, the scattered reflection plate 23 or 閛 polar line 10 and the science and technology line 11 and the capacitor-shaped back 1 | 1 into the electrode 12 reflection &gt; sequentially through the above-mentioned rear side 儇 aurora plate 22 and liquid Note 1 event 1 Crystal layer LC and front m polarizer 21 are emitted to the front side substrate 1 m 〇 In addition, in the above-mentioned running example of the crystal display element »Because the different color fill in this device each color transmitter is set to position each page in the top and bottom direction of the screen • -w · 1 I offset, so M from day Light incident from the left and right sides of the plane »Through the circle element area 1 1 (corresponding to the color filter of different colors side by side in the left and right direction of the screen) 1! Through another —. Fang Zhitu 1 The order region A is emitted »The light can pass through the color filter corresponding to one of the above-mentioned one pixel region A and the color filter corresponding to the different color of the other pixel region A 1. »Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of light absorbed by the color filters 15R, 15G, 15B of different colors. 1 1 In addition * In the above-mentioned embodiment, the widths and widths of the color filters 15R, ί 15G, 15B are made smaller than the widths and lengths of the circle element area A, but 1 | can also make the above Any 1 1 of the width and vertical width of the color filter 15R, 15B is about the same as that of the picture element prime area A. 0 1 I Among them, 1 is preferably the color filter 15R, 1 5G, 1 5 B The horizontal width is smaller than 1 i at ΓΟ! When the horizontal width of the circle element area A is in accordance with the method * As shown in the above example 1 1 t Because the side of the color filter in the plaque element area A 1 Ι It becomes the non-colored light emission area b, and the transmitted pixel area (corresponds to daytime 48 1 Ί 1 1) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 440741 A7 B7 Central Bureau of Economic Affairs —Printed by the Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives V. Description of the invention (π) 1 side-by-side side by side in different colors In the (middle device)--square I 1 I sink element area A, the light that hits the other circle element area A can pass 1 1 through the color filter corresponding to the above- ^ square pixel area A And the corresponding device, please firstly go to the fBW pixel area A of the other side and pass the color of different colors. The probability of both sides of the device becomes lower, so you can make the absorption of these different colors of the color pass device 1 I. 1 I Minimize the light to increase the utilization of the light incident from the left and right of the plane. 1 1 1 Efficiency 〇 Refill * 1 t In addition »Figure 21 is a plan view» It is used to show the second real example of the change The arrangement of the pixels and color filters in the modification example. The pixel arrangement is to draw the corresponding color annihilators 15R, 15G, and 15B of the corresponding page 1 I to each m pixel area A, respectively, to the left and right directions of the 1 1 r plane. Split into 2 1 in such There is a space S between the segmented filters. 1 A region between the segmented filters of the circle region A is used as the non-colored light exit region b. The outer peripheries of A are all used as the bright display area W. In this variation! The divided filters are in the m-to-m direction of the display surface, growing in stripes 1 I &gt; The non-colored light emitting area b and the bright display area V that emit the uncolored 1 1 light that has passed through the m device are arranged in the vertical direction of the display day surface 1. In the liquid crystal display element of this example, 1 I Because there is a vertical strip m along the up and down direction of the bar, the non-reciprocal 1 1 color light emission area M when using external light for display &gt; 1 | can display a color image with sufficient brightness.1 | In addition, Fig. 22 is a plan view 9 for showing the 3rd 1 1 variation of the second embodiment. The pixel arrangement is a color filter that will correspond to each 1 i of each round element area A. 15R, 1 5G, 15B are divided into multiples according to the up and down direction of the surface * 1 1 49 1 1 1 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0 &gt; &lt; 297 mm) 4 4 Ο T 4 1 a? B7 V. Description of the invention (w): Set the division position of the color filters 15R, 15G, 15B of each color side by side in the pixel area A by setting the non-colored light emission area b in each pixel area A. According to the above and below directions of the screen, the color filters of different colors are shifted mutually. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device according to the third modification, both the incident light from above and the left and right directions can be effectively used, and a color circle image with sufficient brightness on the opposite side can be displayed. [Third Example] The 23rd plaque is a cross-sectional view of a liquid crystal display element of the third example. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the structures that are the same as those in the first example, and the explanation is omitted by adding M. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) As shown in plaque 23, on the inner side of the front side substrate 1, among the color filters 15R, 15G, 15B Between the rows and the rows, a reflecting member 51 is provided for reflecting the light emitted from the front of the element toward the front of the element. The reflecting member 51 is made of a high-reflectivity silver or aluminum alloy film, and corresponds to the entire area between the columns and rows of the prime regions A. In addition, the above-mentioned reflection member 51 of K reflects the light incident outside the inter-plaque region of each pixel region A. Therefore, by making the inter-pixel region of each plaque region A bright, K makes the brightness of the entire screen higher. [Fourth embodiment] The twenty-fourth country is a cross-sectional plaque of a liquid crystal display element of the fourth embodiment. A reflective member 24 is disposed in the liquid crystal display element to replace the messy reflective plate 23 disposed on the rear surface of the back substrate 2 in the first example of the upper case. The reflective member 24 is used to transmit the liquid crystal layer LC. The reflection of the light on the opposite side is -50; This paper size adopts the Chinese national standard (CNS &gt; A4 specification (2 丨 OX297) &gt; 4 4 0741 Α7 Β7 5. Description of the invention (49) The liquid crystal layer LC is close to In the vertical direction, the other structures are the same as those in the above-mentioned first pickling example. The configuration of the reflecting member 24 used in this fourth pickling example includes a micro-puppet 25a, and is provided on the back of the micro-shuttle mirror 25a. The white specular reflection film 25b. The above-mentioned microcapsule 25a is formed on the surface of a transparent plate such as glass or acrylic resin, and a small slender cymbal portion is set in parallel in close contact in one direction. The crotch portion is vertical on one side, and in another period [the surface is an inclined surface with a specified inclination angle, and has a cross-sectional shape of a right triangle. In addition, the width of each crotch portion of the micro shuttle mirror 25a described above It is best to make one fake crotch correspond to one A row of element electrodes, or a row of pixel regions in which one ridge portion corresponds to two to three columns. In addition, the above-mentioned reflecting member 24 is an inclined surface of each edge portion of the micro ridge 25a. When the main incident direction t toward the external light is compared with the obliquely upward direction of the daylight surface, that is, the direction perpendicular to the front of the display element, Μ has a way that more external light comes from the direction of the edge of the daylight surface, which is appropriately selected. The direction of the inclined surface of the above-mentioned shuttle mirror section. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) When the liquid crystal display element according to the fourth embodiment is exposed to light, The light reflected by the reflecting member 24 shown in the figure by the dashed arrow in a direction nearly perpendicular to the liquid crystal layer LC passes through the incident light of the peripheral portion of the pixel region A and passes through the adjacent pixel regions A. The emission rate can be reduced. Therefore, the incident light will not be absorbed by the color filter. By increasing the amount of emitted light to brighten the display, it can display high-quality color -51-This paper size is applicable Chinese National Standard (C NS) Α4 specification (2 丨 0297mm) 44 074 t A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention 1 color image 〇1 1 I In addition 9 according to this LCD display element The light is reflected by the above! 1 The reflecting member 24 reflects in a direction close to the liquid crystal layer LC 9 so it is directed toward the front 1 (also in the direction in front of the vertical element) and the amount of light emitted is increased &readable; 1 back 1 Increase the brightness of the front side of the display. 0I 1I [Fifth embodiment] Note that the ancient 1 1 Figure 25 is a cross section 表示 used to show the liquid content of the fifth embodiment of the present invention 1 [Crystal display element 0 addition »It has the same structure as the first embodiment. Fill in the same symbols as in the first installation. * The description is added. &Gt; Λ Omit 'w · 1 | On the 25th circle In the inner side of the front side substrate 1, there are red »record 1 blue 1 1 1 3 color filters 1 5R, 15G, 1 5B» corresponding to the pixel electrodes 3 of the back side substrate 2 1 1, Side-by-side alternately with the column and row directions, and I order side reflection members 52 corresponding to TPT4 and gate line 10, data line 11 and capacitor forming electrode 12 provided on the back substrate 2 1 respectively « Form a transparent protective film (insulating film) covering the above 17 «There should be at least 1 '1 1 transparent facing electrode 18% facing the above-mentioned element electrode 3 1 1 All * The area facing the iicH pixel electrode 3 is used to form the area A of the pixel 1, and then an orientation film 19 is formed on the facing electrode 18. 〇1 | In addition, the above-mentioned side reflection member 52 is formed so that Chromium oxide film and other low reflectance film 52b and chromium film High-reflectivity metal film 52a m sequence 1 | laminated on the front side of substrate 1 &gt; then use photocopying method to make IBH IM type 1 | make the part corresponding to this TFT4 to form approximately 1 I overall covering the above TFT4 Corresponds to the gate medium 10 »data line 11» and capacitors form part 12 of capacitor II II to form continuous line bark respectively, with corresponding m 10, 11 and 1 I -52- 1 1 1 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 OX 297 mm) A707 4 t_B7 V. Description of invention (ri) The response of the medium should be 2 poles electroformed capacitors and capacitors that are below the M range. Shaped point forming 2 11 poles 11 compartments in the A area of the prime map of the house '-1 (formed into a phase medium (ίι shape extreme gate width, the outer domain of the other area is formed by electroforming capacitor and element map), Narrow into a slight shape-above the line, 1 1_ * pole 1 multi-disc medium is very narrow and the size of the material is narrow. In the middle of the picture, the picture element of the picture element is in the form of an on-line shape. The capacity is 2 5 pieces of electricity and 11 structures of the radiation medium.矂 side. It is stated that 10 pictures are printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, that is, in this embodiment, the width of the above-mentioned pixel area is approximately 10 «m, and the amplitude of the data line 11 on the upper line is At about 6 wm, the width of the linear portion of the side reflection member 52 is below 6 u mK. The above-mentioned steel-surface reflecting member 52 uses the above-mentioned high reflectance gold 靥 5 2a to reflect light from the front of the element by the side reflection and is reflected by the reflecting plate 23 on the rear side to reflect the light emitted to the front of the element, which is used to change its emission direction, corresponding to The part of the inter-pixel region of the side reflection member 52, that is, the part corresponding to the TFT 4 and the gate line 10 and the data line 11, surrounds the entire periphery of each pixel region A, and corresponds to the lightning capacity forming electrode 12. A part of the non-colored light emission area b (that is, the non-colored light emission area on the upper edge side of the pixel area A) that crosses each drawing pixel area A according to the left-right direction (horizontal direction) of the drawing surface. b). In this pixel region, the gate lines 10 and data lines 11 corresponding to the side reflection members 52 provided on the inner surface of the front substrate 1 are formed to face each other. Therefore, the actual emission area of the pixel region is larger than the above. The side reflection member 52 is smaller than that of the facing area, as described above, because the plaque element area II— i-I——1 ^^ 1. I---II n 1-I ^^ 1-- --― N II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper uses China National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 44074 1 A7 B7 Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Industrial and consumer cooperative cooperatives Yin Fan 5. Description of the invention (^) 1 The amplitude of the field is about 1 0 un The width of the side reflection plum 5 2 is 6 W m 1 1 I or less * Therefore, the emission area of the area between the plaque elements is reduced very little 〇1 1 Because the above-mentioned side reflection member is provided in the liquid crystal display element, please be 1 to 15 first, so it is reflected from the element-U &gt; side-entrance &gt; by the reflection plate 23 on the rear side Read 1 1 to emit light into the front of the element * to whiten the above-mentioned inter-pixel area and back © 1 I -1 Pixel area A non-colored area b--a part of the f-light output light, such as Attention 1 thing 1 shown by the 25 m arrow m 9 is reflected by the side of the reflecting member 52 and thus the item is again! Change direction * The scattered reflection light is emitted so that the front direction (then fill in this device 1 is nearly perpendicular to The direction of the direction of the screen) The brightness distribution page S_ «·· 1 I light 0 1 1 In addition, t is incident between adjacent pixel areas A ίρ &gt; 1 ΗΒΙ 1 between prime areas! The light is Reflected into non-colored light (white light) is emitted to the front of the element by> λ. The non-colored light emitted in the inter-pixel region is because the 1 crystal molecules in the inter-pixel region are often the initial ones. Twisted orientation state »Μ is often a light of high intensity 0. In addition, in this liquid crystal display element *, because the color transponders 15R, 1 5G, and 15B corresponding to each of the prime regions A in FIG. The area of the prime area A is not only the non-colored light exit area b of the prime area A which does not correspond to the 1 1 color transmitter, but also the above-mentioned pixel-to-pixel area 1 1 domain portion will not be colored. Pass the area 1 to shoot people from the element >> 1 | Reflective plate 23 or gate * Data line 10, 1 1 or capacitor formation capacitor 12 anti-r 1 Η Η Η 光 Light emitted to the side of the element • No The transmission of coloring therefore, 1 1 is reflected by the side reflection of the side reflection member 52 and exits in the front direction. II The amount of light is increased, and light with a brightness distribution is emitted. »High brightness 1 I 1 54 1 1 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (2 丨 0 X 297 cm) 4407 4 1 at B7 Printed by the Bayer Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the Invention (㈠) 1 Non-colored light * It can increase the brightness of the screen viewed from the front 1 1 I. 〇 1 1 and 9 in the upper liquid crystal display element * because from the main source of external light please 1 first 1 shot in the direction of the daylight obliquely upward Into t and then reflected by the reflection plate 23 and so on I -'- * read 1 the light of the back * effectively hits the lateral side of the reflective member 5 2 (T &amp; 1 corresponds to the area along the pixel area) The area in the left and right direction of the screen). And. Meaning 1 I incident 1 into both sides of the side reflection bottle 52 (corresponding to the non-entry item in the pixel area A and then 1 fill the light emission area b part * is set to make The writing on the left and right sides of the daylight plane is installed in the direction). Therefore, the amount of reflection of the side light% f I of the side reflection members 52 becomes larger, which can effectively increase the front brightness 〇1 1 I [No. 6 Embodiment] 1 I The 26th plaque is a flat surface. 1 It is used to indicate the arrangement of the fBH pixels and color filters of the liquid crystal display element 1 of the sixth embodiment. In addition, it is the same as the first embodiment described above, and the same structure is added. The symbol »and its description are omitted by adding M. 1 In the 26th stage, I is equipped with color filters m »J 15R, 15G, 15B on the peripheral edge of the national prime area A, and a non-colored light beam I 1 is formed in the central part of the pixel area. 1 Example of the case where the peripheral edge portion of the M pixel region A shown in FIG. 2 is the non-colored light emission region b »The position of the front substrate 1 and the back substrate 2 is shifted by bonding 1 I * Use Change the relative position of the peripheral edge of the prime region in Figure 1 »with the wiring material 9 on the back substrate 2 and the black screen or the color filter on the substrate 1 I substrate 1» By M change 1 | Uncolored light emission The area of the output area b. The brightness of the plaque area A will vary with each display element. The opposite of this 1 I is * In accordance with the sixth embodiment. • Since iErt _ prime area A-1 I 55 1 1 1 1 This paper size applies to China National Standards (CNS ) A4 specification (210X297 mm) A 1 ^ A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (female 4) The central part is used as the non-colored light exit area and the peripheral part is used as the colored light exit plaque area. The colored light exits the plaque field instead of the high-brightness non-colored light exits the plaque field t &gt;, so it is possible to reduce the brightness variation of each display element. [Seventh embodiment] A cross-sectional view of a liquid crystal display element of a seventh example is shown in a twenty-seventh embodiment. In addition, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same components as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and the description thereof is omitted by adding K. In FIG. 27, the non-colored light emitting region bE is placed at the center of the pixel region A, and the formation of each of the pixel electrodes 3 formed of a transparent conductive film is a conductive reflection made of M gold or the like. The film 3b covers the area corresponding to the non-colored light emitting area b, and the area of the pixel electrode 3 not covered by the reflective film 3b is used to form a light transmission area 3a, and only the back side substrate 2 is transmitted in the pixel area A The light of the front substrate 1 becomes colored light. In the liquid crystal display device according to the seventh embodiment, one of the light entering the non-colored light exiting area b and the colored light exiting area a that is incident outside the front-side substrate 1 is transmitted through the reflective film 3b or placed on the backside. The reflecting plate 23 on the rear surface of the substrate 2 reflects and is emitted to the front of the element through M. Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). In addition, the area where the reflection 3b is formed may have the same area as the non-colored emission area b. For a slightly larger area, in this case, the transmitted light radiated from the back-side substrate 2 to the front-side substrate 1 can be more reliably shielded by the reflection film 3b. The reflective film 3b of the pixel electrode 3 is a layer disposed on the liquid crystal layer LC side, but may be a layer disposed on the substrate 2 side. -56- This paper size is applicable to China National Building Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 440741 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (β) In addition, in the seventh embodiment, it can also be behind the back side substrate 2 A semi-transmissive reflecting plate 26 is used instead of the reflecting members such as the messy reflecting plate 23. In this case, illumination light such as back light (not shown in the figure) is irradiated from the rear surface of the back-side substrate 2 and after passing through the semi-transmissive reflecting plate 26, only the colored light exit area a is transmitted, and the non-colored light is emitted. The emission region b is impermeable because of the conductive reflective film 3b described above. Therefore, without reducing the contrast, a transmissive and reflective display element can be formed. In addition, in the liquid crystal display element of the present invention, a transmissive liquid crystal display element can be formed without using a reflective plate. In this case, a bright color image display can also be guessed. n — ^ 1----II 1.--1 ^^ 1-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs -57- This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210X297 mm)

Claims (1)

申請專利範圍 Α8 Β8 C8 m 經濟部中央標準局—工消費合作社印製 之 外 M., 對區 所 用 域 之色所 對 另成域,素 器 , 區 外著域 面 之形區方圖 濾 域 出 部非區 相 面來素一述 中過 區 射 中緣之出 中 互 之用圖何上 其色 出 光 其周部射 其 之 對-個任於 ,彩 射 色 。,了 緣光 , : 板 面對多之小 。置之 光 著出置除周色 置 有基 述面之面積 間裝區 色 非射裝之其著 裝 備.,之 上相定内面 之示素 著 成其示域在之 示 具對對 在互界之之 板顯圖 成和形將顯區成份 顯 是面一 成極所板有 基晶述 形;域接晶素形部 晶 激相述 彤電域基具 對液上 域出區直液圖由央 液 特互上 ,1區對所 一之於 區射之,之述域中 之 其成在 極第之一, 述項小 之和器色項上區其 項 ,置成 電個對述域 上1積 器色濾著2在素在 1 置配胗 2多面上匾 在第面 濾著過行第置圖成 第 裝被 * 第述搔在素 夾圍由 過行色進圍配之形 圍 示,極 之上電設圖和包範膜 色進彩光範被述和 範 顯板電;個與1被之.,被利色 彩光該人利器上域 利 晶基1方1為第,述積,專著 該人到射專濾,區 專 液之第一為成述膜上面層請之 到射應對請過部出。請 種對個之少方上色到之晶申述.,應對對不申色央射成申 一 一 多面至一與著應域液如上形對來未,如彩中光構如 I -裝------訂丨-·---:---^ (請先閣讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本纸張尺度速用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2!0X297公釐) 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 440741 鉍 C8 D8六、申請專利範圍 上述之著色膜由對應到各假圄素區域之不同色之多龌 彩色過濾器所形成,Μ等間隔被排列成對應到各涸圜 素區域。 5.如申請專利範圖第1項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之著色膜在與基板面平行之面上形成長條形狀, 當從正面看液晶顯示元件時,其沿著水平方向之横寬 小於與該水平方向正交之方向之寬度。 S.如申請專利範圍第1項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之多個圖素區域被排列成隔開指定之間隔,在多 個圖素區域之間之圖素間區域形成經常射出光之亮顯 示區域。 7. 如申請專利範園第1項之液晶顯示装置,其中 上述之非著色光射出區域在與基板面平行之面上形成 長條形狀,當從正面看液晶顯示元件時,其與水平方 向正交之縱向較長。 8. 如申請專利範圃第1項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 分別形成在多個圖素區域之多個上述非著色光射出區 域,在與基板面平行之面上被配置成當從正面看液晶 顯示元件時位於與水平方向正交之縱向之延伸實質線 上0 9. 如申請專利範圍第1項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之画素區域具備有著色光射出區域,在與基板面 平行之面上具有多傾著色膜,當從正面看液晶顯示元 件時被配置成沿著水平方向之横方向分割成多個。 _ 5 9 _ 〆 (請先胪.1^承、注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ297公釐) 44 07 4 1 經濟部中央標隼局員工消費合作社印策 A8 B8 C8 , D8六、申請專利範圍 10. 如申請專利範圍第1項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之臑素區域具備有著色光射出區域,在與基板面 平行之面上具有多個著色膜,當從正面看液晶顯示元 件時被配置成沿著水平方向之正交之縱向分割成多個。 11. 如申請專利範圍第1項之液晶顯示装置,其中 上逑之圖素區域形成著色光射出匾域,具有四角形κ 外之形狀之上述著色膜。 12. 如申請專利舱園第1項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 被配置在上述圈素內之上述著色膜,相對於從正面看 液晶顯示元件時之水平方向鄰接之圖素區域内之不同 色之著色膜,在各傾色被配置成位於水平方向之正交 方向之偏移位置。 13. 如申請專利範圍第1項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之圄素區域之構成包含有:著色光射出區域,具 有上述之著色膜被S置在其周緣近傍部份;和非著色 光射出區域,形成在上述圖素區域之中央部份。 14. 如申請專利範菌第1項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 更具備有反射構件用來反射透過上述液晶層之光。 15_如申請專利範匾第14項之液晶顧示裝置,其中 上述之反射構件被配置在光之射入側之相反側之基板 之外面。 16,如申請專利範圍第15項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之反射構件是反射板,具有指向性用來使從廣角 度範圃射入之光,Μ狹角度範圍依指定方向射出。 -6 0 - --------1¾------?τ--------.線 (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CMS ) Α4規格(2】0x297公釐) A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 17. 如申請專利範園第14項之液晶顧示裝置,其中 上述之反射構件被設置在位於光之射入側之相反側之 背面側基板之內面。 18. 如申請專利範圍第1項之液晶顧示装置,其中 更具備有第2反射膜,被配置在上述多個圖素區域間 ,用來反射射入到上述圖素區域之間之光。 19. 如申謫專利範圍第18項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之反射膜被配置在光之射入側之基板之内面。 20. 如申請專利範圍第18項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之反射膜被配置在光之射入側基板之面對之基板 之內面。 21. 如申請專利範圍第1項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 在上述之一對基板之任何一涸之内面,更具備有側面 反射裝置設有反射_用來反射該光其方式是至少在側 茴使從基板射出之射出角變小。 22. 如申請專利範圍第21項之液晶顯示装置,其中 上述之側面反射裝置被E置成沿著液晶顯示元件之左 右方向。 23. 如申請專利範圍第21項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 經濟部中央標隼局員工消費合作社印製 (請先&amp;'讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 上述之撕面反射裝置被配置成包圃上述圖素區域之周 圍之方向。 24. 如申請專利範圍第21項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之側面反射裝置被配置成横切非著色光射出區域 之一部份。 -61- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標率(CNS &gt; A4規格(210X297公釐) 4407 41 六、申請專利範圍 成 中構中 其所其 , 膜 , 置射置 裝反裝 示之示 顯狀顯 晶線晶 液成液 之形之 項由項 1 1L 1 2 置 2 第装第 圍射圍 範反範 利面利 專側專 請之諳 申述申 如上如 膜 射 反 之中 狀其 點, 値置 多裝 置示 配顯 是晶 成液 構之 之項 置 2 装第 射圍 反範 面利 牺專 之謓 述申 上如 料鄰 材成 率置 射配 折被 低層 和之 料料 材材 率率 射射 折折 高之 由逑 置上 裝 , 射成 反構 面所 倒膜 C 之層板 述積基 上之接 光 之 色 中同 其不 ,讓 置能 裝由 示膜 顯色 晶著 液之 之内 項域 1 區 第素 圍圖 範述 利上 專在 請置 申配 如被 對 器 濾 過 色 彩 該 色 0 艏率 各稹 在面 ,之 成同 構不 所有 器具 濾域 過區 色素 彩圃 之之 過述 透上 短 之 域 中區 其光 ,視 置可 裝讓 示以 顯用 晶少 液至 之是 項器 8 2 濾 第過 圍色 範彩 利傾 專各 請之 申述 如上 素器 匾濾 之過 述色 上彩 於之 小過 積透 面光 其之 器長 濾波 過長 色述 彩上 之釀 過以 透用 光與 之當 倒 , 長域 波區 積 面 其 器 濾 過 色 彩 之 過 透 光 之 長 波 短 讓 以 用 1 ΰ 時小 較較 比率 (诗i丨讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 中 之 中 中域 其區 ,光 置視 裝可 示讓 顯以 晶用 液有 之含 項包 1 成 第構 圍之 範膜 利色 專箸 請之 申逑 如上 之著 域之 區過 長透 波光 長之 讓域 以區 用長 ,波 膜短 色讓 箸以 之用 過和 透 , 光膜 之色 域箸 區之 長過 波透 間光 厚 變ΟΓ 序01 順(C 之圍 述範 上 色 照之 依圍 艏包 各所 其標 是座 厚色 膜之 之膜 有色 具箸 所色 ,各 膜 使 色和 —J 1 - ί I - - I—I - I rlt n ‘11 i n - - - II -I— - -I ! - - - n--, 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(21〇Χ297公釐) 07 4 1 锰 C8 m 六、申請專利範圍 gamut)成為最大。 31. 如申請專利範圍第30項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之著色_是紅,綠,藍之3色(primary color) 之彩色過漶器。 32. 如申請專利範圍第31項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述各色之彩色過濾器所具有之膜厚是使該彩色過濾 器之上述色範園(color gaBut)之面積在CJE 1976 co 丨 or systen 之 3*1&gt;$面上成為 750M 上。 33. 如申請專利範圍第31項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述各色之彩色過濾器之膜厚是使透過上述各色之彩 色過薄器之著色光之溫合光(color mixing)之色度 -- (white c h r o s a )在 C I E 1976 L * a ^ b * color system:^ 面上成為1.5以下之值。 34. 如申請專利範圍第31項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述各色之彩色過濾器由使用有顔料分散材料之紅色 ,綠色,和藍色之彩色過«器所構成,紅色過濾器之 膜厚為0.9〜1.2w»,绿色過濾器之膜厚為0,8〜1.1 wn,和Μ色過濾器之膜厚為1.1〜1.4wb。 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 35. 如申請專利範圍第31項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述各色之彩色過漶器分別具有不同之面積率,和其 各個對圖素區域之面積率是依照用Μ諶中間波長區域 之光透過之著色膜,用Κ讓短波長區域之光透過之著 色膜,和用从讓長波長區域之光透過之著色膜之順序 ,順序的變大。 -6 3 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(2Ι0Χ297公釐) 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印繁 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 36. 如申請專利範圍第31項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 至少線色過濾器和藍色過濾器所具有之面積小於上述 之匾素區域,上述圖素區域中之未對應到上述彩色過 濾器之區域形成非箸色光之射出區域〇 37. 如申請專利範圍第31項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述各色之彩色過濾器分別具有紅色為0.9〜1.2# Β, 緣色為β.8〜1.1 θβ,和藍色為1.1〜1.4# a之膜厚, 和對上逑圖素區域分別具有紅色為90〜953;,緣色為60 〜655K,和藍色為75〜80S;之面稹率。 38. 如申請專利範圍第31項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之液晶層被設定成在對應到形成有上述彩色過濾 器之區域具有第1液晶層厚dl,和在對應到形成有上 逑彩色過濂器之域匾以外之其他區域具有第2液晶層 厚d2,該等液晶層厚dl,d2和上述液晶層之折射率異 方性△ η之積之值和△ nd2被設定使透過具有上述 積之值Andl之液晶元件之光和透過具有上述積之值 △ nd2之液晶元件之光各匍之分光透過率分布合成後之 分光透過率分布,在可視光波長區域實質上成為平坦 之值。 39. 如申請專利範圍第30項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之一對基板所包夾之上述液晶層使射人光之前面 倒之基板近傍之液晶分子以該前面倒基板之左右方向 作為基準,在左轉〜45°之範圍内進行定向,朝 向面對前面倒基板之背面側之基板,以右轉90°之杻 轉角進行扭轉定向》 -6 4 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210 X 297公釐} IP f] 41 n^n ^il^i ^ -nt * 1 νξ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經涛部中央標準局員工消f合作社印装 Α8 Β8 C8 , D8六、申請專利範圍 40. 如申請專利範園第1項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之液晶麿被設定成在對應到形成有上述著色瞑之 區域具有第1液晶廇厚dl,和在對應到形成有上述著 色膜之區域Μ外之其他區域具有第2液晶層厚d2,該 等液晶層厚dl,d2和上述液晶層之折射率異方性之 稹之值Δη(Π和被設定成使透過具有上述積之值 △ ndl之液晶元件之光和透過具有上述稹之值And2之 液晶元件之光之各個之分光透通率分布合成後之分光 透過率分布,在可視光波長匾域實質上成為平坦之值。 41. 如申請專利範圍第40項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 具有上述著色膜之區域之上述液晶層之上述積之值 Andl,和未具有上述著色膜之區域之上述硖晶層之 上述積之值And 2,在具有折射率異方式Δη和層厚d 之液晶元件中,使液晶層之Arid之值進行變化,M d0 表示透過率為最大值之液晶層厚時,則可K滿足 Δ ndl&lt;A ndO&lt;A nd2 之關係D 42. 如申請專利範圍第40項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 更形成有平坦化膜.在配置有上述著色膜之基板上經 由形成平坦化膜用來使由於形成上述著色膜而產生之 凹凸變為平坦。 43. 如申請専利範圍第40項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之著色膜由透過波長區域互不相同之多個彩色過 濾器所構成,該等彩色過濾器之膜厚被設定成在可視 1'-------------1T—·--,·--- ^ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) A8 B8 C8 D8 經濟部中央橾隼局員工消費合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 光區域中.依照用Μ諶中間波長區域之光透過之彩色 過濾器,用以諶長波長區域之光透過之彩色過濾器, 和用Μ讓短波長區域之光透遇之彩色通濾器之順序, 順序的變厚,和使各個彩色過通器之色座標所包圍之 色範圖(color gamut)成為最大。 44. 如申請專利範圃第40項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 更具備有 第〗和第2定向膜,分別設在上述之一對基板之内® ;和 一對之餹極光板,被配置在上述一對基板之外俩,形 成包夾該等基板; 設在光射入側之前面側基板之第1定向膜,在從正面 看液晶顯示元件時之Μ水平方向作為基準在轉0。〜 45 °之範圍內,被腌加定向處理,設在與上述前面側 基板面對之背面側之基板之第2定向膜,依照對上述 第1定向膜之定向處理方向肜成90°之交叉方向,被 Ife加定向處理。 45. 如申請專利範圍第44項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述液晶層之上述背面側基板近傍之液晶分子,在從 上述前面側基板看時對水平方向左轉5°〜30。之角度 範圍內之方向被定向。 46. 如申請專利範圍第44項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述液晶層之上述背面側基板近傍之液晶分子,在從 上述前面側基板看時對水平方向左轉大約10°〜大約 -66 - (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -IP I n n^i I .^1^1 *一-9J1^1 F^n ml 1 n^i l^i n^i 1^1 ml l^i 1¾ 本紙張又度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 C8 D8 κ、申請專利乾圍 25°之角度範圍內之方向被定向。 47. 如申請專利範藺第44項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之液晶層被設定成在對應到形成有上述彩色過濾 器之區域具有第1液晶層厚dl,和在對應到形成有上 述彩色過濾器之區域Μ外之其他區域其有第2液晶層 厚d2,該等液晶層厚dl,d2和上述液晶層之折射率異 方性An之值之Andl和AndZ被設定成使透過具有上 述積之值Andl之液晶元件之光和透過具有上述積之 值ΛηΜ之液晶元件之光之各涸之分光透過率分布合 成後之分光透過率分布,在可視光波長區域實質上成 為平坦之值。 48. 如申請專利範圉第44項之液晶顯示裝置,其中 上述之著色膜之膜厚被設定成在可視光區域中,依照 用Μ讓中間波長區域之光透過之著色膜,用Κ謓長波 區域之光透過之著色膜,和用以讓短波長區域之光透 遇之著色膜之顒序,頤序的變厚,和使各個著色膜之 色座標所包圍之色範圍(color gaiaut)成為最大。 (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -67- 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐&gt;Scope of patent application Α8 Β8 C8 m Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs—Industrial and Consumer Cooperative Cooperatives. M., the color of the area used by the area is divided into another area, the element, and the area outside the area. The non-regional aspects of the output part are all described in the middle area, the middle side, the middle side, the middle side, the middle side, the middle side, and the outer side, and the peripheral side, and the opposite side. , Yuan Yuanguang,: The board faces are so small. The light of the home is in addition to the surrounding area where the basic surface is placed. The interior equipment area is non-radio equipment and its writing equipment. On the inner surface of the prime element is written in the display area. The plate display of the realm shows the shape and shape of the display area. The basic crystals are described by the surface and the poles; the crystal-excited phase of the domain is connected to the element form. The picture is uploaded by the central fluid, the area 1 is the same as the area, and the composition in the domain is the first one, and the small item is on the color component, and it is set into an electrical pair. On the field, 1 color filter is placed on the surface, 2 is placed on the prime, 1 is placed on the 2 sides, and the plaque is filtered on the first side. The shape is shown, the electrical design on the pole and the film color into the colored light fan are described and the fan is displayed on the board; the one and the 1 are taken. The colored light is the sharp weapon of the person. Shuji, the person who wrote the monograph to the radiographer, the first in the zone is the upper layer of the film. Please go to the radiographer and respond to it. Please make a statement on the color of the little ones. You should respond to the non-declaration of the color of the central shooting into the one-to-one and one-to-one correspondence with the domain of the liquid as above. ----- Order 丨-· ---: --- ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper is a fast-moving Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 specification (2! 0X297) (%) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 440741 Bismuth C8 D8 VI. Patent application scope The above-mentioned colored film is formed by multi-color filters with different colors corresponding to each pseudocyanine region, and M is arranged at equal intervals. Corresponds to each elementary region. 5. The liquid crystal display device according to item 1 of the patent application chart, wherein the above-mentioned colored film is formed in a long shape on a surface parallel to the substrate surface, and when the liquid crystal display element is viewed from the front, its horizontal width along the horizontal direction The width is smaller than the direction orthogonal to the horizontal direction. S. The liquid crystal display device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the above-mentioned plurality of pixel regions are arranged at a specified interval, and the inter-pixel regions between the plurality of pixel regions form a light that often emits light. Display area. 7. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the first patent application, wherein the above-mentioned non-colored light emitting area is formed in a long shape on a surface parallel to the substrate surface. When the liquid crystal display element is viewed from the front, it is positive to the horizontal direction. Longer vertical. 8. The liquid crystal display device according to item 1 of the patent application, wherein a plurality of the above-mentioned non-colored light emitting regions respectively formed in a plurality of pixel regions are arranged on a surface parallel to the substrate surface so that the liquid crystal is viewed from the front. The display element is located on a longitudinally extending substantial line orthogonal to the horizontal direction. 0. For example, in the liquid crystal display device of the first scope of the patent application, the above pixel area is provided with a colored light emitting area, and the surface is parallel to the substrate surface. The multi-tilt colored film is arranged to be divided into a plurality of pieces along the horizontal direction when the liquid crystal display element is viewed from the front. _ 5 9 _ 〆 (please 胪 .1 ^ commit, please note before filling out this page) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210 × 297 mm) 44 07 4 1 Employees ’consumption by the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperative cooperative policy A8 B8 C8, D8 VI. Patent application scope 10. For the liquid crystal display device of the first patent application scope, wherein the above-mentioned elementary region has a colored light emission region, and a plurality of regions are provided on a surface parallel to the substrate surface When the liquid crystal display element is viewed from the front, the coloring film is arranged to be divided into a plurality of pieces along a vertical direction orthogonal to the horizontal direction. 11. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the scope of application for a patent, wherein the pixel region of the upper part forms a colored light exit plaque field, and has the above-mentioned colored film having a shape other than a quadrangular κ. 12. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the first patent application, wherein the coloring film disposed in the circle element is different in color from the pixel area adjacent to the horizontal direction when the liquid crystal display element is viewed from the front. The coloring film is disposed at an offset position in a direction orthogonal to the horizontal direction in each of the inclination colors. 13. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the scope of application for patent, wherein the structure of the above-mentioned elementary region includes: a colored light emission region, the above-mentioned colored film is placed near the periphery of S; and non-colored light emission The region is formed in the central part of the pixel region. 14. The liquid crystal display device according to item 1 of the patent application, further comprising a reflecting member for reflecting light transmitted through the liquid crystal layer. 15_ The liquid crystal display device according to item 14 of the patent application plaque, wherein the above-mentioned reflecting member is arranged on the outer surface of the substrate on the opposite side to the incident side of light. 16. The liquid crystal display device according to item 15 of the patent application range, wherein the above-mentioned reflecting member is a reflecting plate having directivity to make the light incident from a wide-angle fan garden emit in a narrow angle range in a specified direction. -6 0--------- 1¾ ------? Τ --------. Line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CMS) A4 Specification (2) 0x297 mm A8 B8 C8 D8 6. Application for Patent Scope 17. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the patent application No. 14 in which the above-mentioned reflective member is arranged on the light The inner surface of the backside substrate on the opposite side of the incident side. 18. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the first patent application scope further includes a second reflective film disposed between the plurality of pixel regions to reflect light incident between the pixel regions. 19. The liquid crystal display device of claim 18, wherein the above-mentioned reflective film is disposed on the inner surface of the substrate on which the light is incident. 20. The liquid crystal display device according to claim 18, wherein the above-mentioned reflective film is disposed on the inner surface of the substrate facing the light-incident side substrate. 21. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the scope of application for patent No. 1, wherein the inside of any one of the above-mentioned pair of substrates is further equipped with a side reflection device provided with a reflection _ used to reflect the light at least on the side The emission angle from the substrate is made smaller. 22. The liquid crystal display device as claimed in item 21 of the patent application, wherein the above-mentioned side reflection device is placed along the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display element. 23. If you apply for a liquid crystal display device under the scope of patent application No. 21, which is printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please &amp; 'read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The above-mentioned tear-reflective device is configured Form the direction around the above pixel area. 24. The liquid crystal display device as claimed in claim 21, wherein the above-mentioned side reflection device is configured to cross a part of the non-colored light exit area. -61- This paper size is applicable to China's national standard (CNS &gt; A4 size (210X297mm) 4407 41. 6. The scope of patent application is in the form of the structure, film, injection, reverse installation, etc. The item of the crystal line of the crystal line is formed by the item 1 1L 1 2 Set 2 The second round of the shooting range Fan Fan Fanli Specially requested the 谙 representation that the above is the same as the film shooting, 値The multi-device display configuration is the item of the crystal structure. 2 The installation of the anti-fan surface is not the only benefit of the special description of the application. The adjacent material yield is set. The rate of shooting is high and the top is installed by the top. The shot is the same as the color of the light on the substrate of the layer C of the inverted film C. Let the display be colored by the display film. The inner region of the liquid domain, the first area of the prime circle map, Fan Shuli, please apply for the color of the color if it is filtered by the device. The description of the color garden can be seen through the light in the short area. The display uses crystal less liquid to be the collar device 8 2 filter the color of the fan Fan Caili Qing each of the special descriptions please refer to the above description of the plaque filter, the color of the small over-colored surface light and its length filter If the color is too long, it will be reversed with light, and the long-range wave area will have a filter that filters the color. The long wave will be short. Let the ratio be smaller than 1 hour. (Poem i 丨 Read Note on the back, please fill in this page again.) The Central and Central Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs has printed the middle and middle areas of the Consumer Cooperative in the Consumer Cooperatives. The light equipment can display the content package of the crystal liquid 1%. Fan film and color special application, please apply for the above. The area of the above works is too long. The wavelength of the light is too long to allow the area to be long. The short color of the wave film is to let it be used and transparent. The thickness changes over time when the wave passes through 0Γ sequence 01 Shun (the range of the color of the picture on the basis of the envelope of the color of the film is the color of the film with a thick color film, the color and color of each film—J 1 -ί I--I—I-I rlt n '11 in---II -I— --I!---N--, this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (21〇 × 297 mm) 07 4 1 Manganese C8 m 6. The scope of patent application (gamut) becomes the largest. 31. For example, the liquid crystal display device in the scope of patent application No. 30, wherein the above-mentioned coloring is a primary color of red, green, and blue. 32. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the 31st scope of the patent application, wherein the color filter of each color filter has a film thickness such that the area of the color gaBut of the color filter is CJE 1976 co 丨 or systen The 3 * 1 &gt; $ surface becomes 750M. 33. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the scope of application for patent No. 31, wherein the film thickness of the color filters of the above-mentioned colors is the chromaticity of the color mixing of the colored light passing through the color thinner of the above-mentioned colors-(white chrosa) on the CIE 1976 L * a ^ b * color system: ^ surface has a value of 1.5 or less. 34. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the 31st scope of the patent application, wherein the color filters of the above colors are composed of red, green, and blue color filters using pigment dispersion materials, and the film thickness of the red filter is 0.9 ~ 1.2w », the film thickness of the green filter is 0,8 ~ 1.1 wn, and the film thickness of the M color filter is 1.1 ~ 1.4wb. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 35. If the liquid crystal display device of the 31st scope of the application for a patent, the above-mentioned color filters have different areas Ratio, and the area ratio of each pixel region are based on a coloring film that transmits light in the middle wavelength region, a coloring film that transmits light in the short wavelength region with κ, and a film that transmits light in the long wavelength region with κ. The order of the colored film becomes larger. -6 3-This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2IO × 297 mm) Employees' Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, India and India A8 B8 C8 D8 6. Scope of patent application 36. If the scope of patent application item 31 In a liquid crystal display device, at least the area of the linear color filter and the blue filter is smaller than the above-mentioned plaque area, and the area of the above-mentioned pixel area that does not correspond to the above-mentioned color filter forms a non-black light emitting area. 37 For example, the liquid crystal display device of the 31st scope of the patent application, wherein the color filters of the above colors have a red color of 0.9 ~ 1.2 # Β, an edge color of β.8 ~ 1.1 θβ, and a blue color of 1.1 ~ 1.4 # a. The film thickness and the pixel area of the upper surface have 90 ~ 953 in red, 60 ~ 655K in edge color, and 75 ~ 80S in blue; respectively. 38. The liquid crystal display device according to item 31 of the scope of patent application, wherein the liquid crystal layer is set to have a first liquid crystal layer thickness d1 in a region corresponding to the above-mentioned color filter, and a color corresponding to the upper color is formed thereon. The area other than the domain plaque of the filter has a second liquid crystal layer thickness d2, and the value of the product of the liquid crystal layer thicknesses dl, d2 and the refractive index anisotropy Δη of the liquid crystal layer Δ nd2 is set so that the transmission has The light transmittance distribution of the light transmittance of the liquid crystal element of the above product Andl and the light transmittance of each light beam transmitted through the liquid crystal element having the above product value of Δnd2 is synthesized to be a substantially flat value in the visible light wavelength region. . 39. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the scope of application for patent No. 30, wherein the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the substrate faced by the above-mentioned liquid crystal layer sandwiched by one of the substrates are based on the left and right directions of the front substrate, Orientation within a range of left turn ~ 45 °, facing the substrate facing the back side of the front inverted substrate, and twist orientation at a turn angle of 90 ° to the right "-6 4-This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) IP f] 41 n ^ n ^ il ^ i ^ -nt * 1 νξ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Install A8, B8, C8, and D8. Patent application scope 40. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the patent application No. 1 in which the above-mentioned liquid crystal film is set to have a first liquid crystal film thickness in a region corresponding to the formation of the above-mentioned colored film. dl, and a second liquid crystal layer thickness d2 in areas other than the area M corresponding to the formation of the above-mentioned colored film, and the thickness Δη of the liquid crystal layer thickness dl, d2 and the refractive index anisotropy of the liquid crystal layer Δη ( Π 和 is set so that the transmission has The spectral transmittance distribution of the combined light transmittance distribution of the light of the liquid crystal element with the value of Δ ndl and each of the light transmitted through the liquid crystal element having the value of 稹 And2 is substantially flat in the visible light wavelength plaque domain. 41. For example, the liquid crystal display device according to item 40 of the scope of patent application, in which the value Andl of the above product of the liquid crystal layer in the region having the above-mentioned colored film and the above-mentioned crystal layer in the region without the above-mentioned colored film The value of the product is And 2. In a liquid crystal element having a refractive index difference mode Δη and a layer thickness d, the value of Arid of the liquid crystal layer is changed. When M d0 represents the thickness of the liquid crystal layer having the maximum transmittance, K can be satisfied. Δ ndl &lt; A ndO &lt; A nd2 relationship D 42. For example, the liquid crystal display device under the scope of application for patent No. 40, wherein a flattening film is further formed. A flattening film is formed on a substrate configured with the above-mentioned colored film to make the The unevenness caused by the formation of the above-mentioned colored film becomes flat. 43. For example, in the application for a liquid crystal display device of the item 40 of the profit scope, wherein the above-mentioned colored film is composed of a plurality of colors having mutually different transmission wavelength regions The thickness of the color filter is set to be visible at 1 '------------- 1T—— ·-, · --- ^ (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page again for this matter) This paper size applies Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) A8 B8 C8 D8 Printed by the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumer Cooperatives 6. The scope of patent application is in the light area. (1) the order of the color filter through which the light in the middle wavelength region is transmitted, the color filter used for transmitting the light in the long wavelength region, and the color pass filter that allows the light in the short wavelength region to pass through, the order becomes thicker, and The color gamut surrounded by the color coordinates of each color passer is maximized. 44. For example, the liquid crystal display device of the patent application No. 40, which further includes the first and second orientation films, which are respectively disposed in one of the above-mentioned pair of substrates®; and one pair of 餹 aurora plates, which are arranged in The two other substrates are formed to sandwich the substrates. The first alignment film provided on the front substrate on the front side of the light incident side is turned to 0 when the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display element is viewed from the front. Within the range of ~ 45 °, the second orientation film that has been pickled and oriented, and is placed on the substrate facing the front side of the front side, and the second orientation film is aligned at 90 ° according to the orientation direction of the first orientation film. Direction, ife plus directional processing. 45. The liquid crystal display device according to item 44 of the scope of application, wherein the liquid crystal molecules near the back side substrate of the liquid crystal layer are turned leftward by 5 ° to 30 ° in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front side substrate. The direction within the angle range is oriented. 46. The liquid crystal display device according to item 44 of the patent application scope, wherein the liquid crystal molecules near the back side substrate of the liquid crystal layer are turned left by about 10 ° to about -66 in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front side substrate-( (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -IP I nn ^ i I. ^ 1 ^ 1 * 一 -9J1 ^ 1 F ^ n ml 1 n ^ il ^ in ^ i 1 ^ 1 ml l ^ i 1¾ This paper is again applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm). The C8 D8 κ printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the patent application are oriented within an angle of 25 °. 47. The liquid crystal display device according to item 44 of the patent application, wherein the liquid crystal layer is set to have a first liquid crystal layer thickness d1 in a region corresponding to the formation of the color filter, and in a region corresponding to the formation of the color The area other than the area M of the filter has a second liquid crystal layer thickness d2, and the thicknesses of the liquid crystal layers dl, d2 and the values of the refractive index anisotropy An of the liquid crystal layer, Andl and AndZ, are set so that the transmission has the above-mentioned The spectral transmittance distribution after combining the light transmittance distributions of the light of the liquid crystal element Andl and the light transmitted through the liquid crystal element having the above product value ΔηM is substantially flat in the visible light wavelength region. 48. For example, the liquid crystal display device according to item 44 of the patent application, wherein the film thickness of the above-mentioned coloring film is set in the visible light region, and according to the coloring film that transmits light in the middle wavelength region by using M, a long wave is used. The order of the coloring film through which the light in the region passes, and the coloring film used to allow the light in the short wavelength region to pass through, the order of the thickness is increased, and the color range (color gaiaut) surrounded by the color coordinates of each coloring film becomes maximum. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) -67- This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm &gt;
TW086119352A 1996-12-25 1997-12-19 Color liquid crystal display device TW440741B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP8345850A JPH10186347A (en) 1996-12-25 1996-12-25 Liquid crystal display device
JP9077905A JPH10268289A (en) 1997-03-28 1997-03-28 Liquid crystal display device
JP9077907A JPH10268299A (en) 1997-03-28 1997-03-28 Liquid crystal display device
JP9127227A JPH10319386A (en) 1997-05-16 1997-05-16 Liquid crystal display panel
JP13357297A JP3633206B2 (en) 1997-05-23 1997-05-23 Liquid crystal display

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW440741B true TW440741B (en) 2001-06-16

Family

ID=27524695

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW086119352A TW440741B (en) 1996-12-25 1997-12-19 Color liquid crystal display device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TW440741B (en)

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6124909A (en) Color liquid crystal display device having a plurality of pixel areas which emit non-colored light
TW583478B (en) Liquid crystal display unit
JP3738549B2 (en) Liquid crystal display element
TW574586B (en) Liquid crystal display element
US20060055713A1 (en) Color display element, method for driving color display element, and display apparatus having color display element
JPH0215047B2 (en)
JP2005338264A (en) Liquid crystal display
JP2006526810A5 (en)
TW201234083A (en) Display panel
CN102789092B (en) Liquid-crystal apparatus and the electronic equipment including liquid-crystal apparatus
JP2005352474A (en) Color display device
TW436658B (en) A reflection-type color LCD device, the driving method of the same and an electronic machine
US20120127406A1 (en) Reflective display
US6654082B1 (en) Liquid crystal display element and color display device having particular transflector
TW548488B (en) Color liquid crystal display
TW528905B (en) Display device and electronic machine
JP2005128571A (en) Color liquid crystal device and electronic apparatus using same
TW440741B (en) Color liquid crystal display device
JP5329671B2 (en) Liquid crystal display
JP2009014892A (en) Liquid crystal display device
JPH10319386A (en) Liquid crystal display panel
JP3648936B2 (en) Liquid crystal display element
WO2011148701A1 (en) Color filter, and reflection-type display device equipped with same
CN101477265B (en) LCD device, multi-vision angle LCD panel and its manufacturing method
JPH0465369B2 (en)

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees